[go: up one dir, main page]

EP4595781A1 - Pouched products containing shreddable filler - Google Patents

Pouched products containing shreddable filler

Info

Publication number
EP4595781A1
EP4595781A1 EP24155134.0A EP24155134A EP4595781A1 EP 4595781 A1 EP4595781 A1 EP 4595781A1 EP 24155134 A EP24155134 A EP 24155134A EP 4595781 A1 EP4595781 A1 EP 4595781A1
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
weight
acid
composition
nicotine
tobacco
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
EP24155134.0A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Inventor
Nicolas VON COSMOS
Michael A Zawadzki
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Nicoventures Trading Ltd
Original Assignee
Nicoventures Trading Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nicoventures Trading Ltd filed Critical Nicoventures Trading Ltd
Priority to EP24155134.0A priority Critical patent/EP4595781A1/en
Priority to PCT/IB2025/050981 priority patent/WO2025163521A1/en
Publication of EP4595781A1 publication Critical patent/EP4595781A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B13/00Tobacco for pipes, for cigars, e.g. cigar inserts, or for cigarettes; Chewing tobacco; Snuff
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B15/00Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
    • A24B15/10Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
    • A24B15/12Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes of reconstituted tobacco
    • A24B15/14Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes of reconstituted tobacco made of tobacco and a binding agent not derived from tobacco
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B15/00Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
    • A24B15/10Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
    • A24B15/16Chemical features of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes of tobacco substitutes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B15/00Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
    • A24B15/18Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
    • A24B15/28Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
    • A24B15/281Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances the action of the chemical substances being delayed
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B15/00Chemical features or treatment of tobacco; Tobacco substitutes, e.g. in liquid form
    • A24B15/18Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes
    • A24B15/28Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances
    • A24B15/30Treatment of tobacco products or tobacco substitutes by chemical substances by organic substances
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A24TOBACCO; CIGARS; CIGARETTES; SIMULATED SMOKING DEVICES; SMOKERS' REQUISITES
    • A24BMANUFACTURE OR PREPARATION OF TOBACCO FOR SMOKING OR CHEWING; TOBACCO; SNUFF
    • A24B3/00Preparing tobacco in the factory
    • A24B3/14Forming reconstituted tobacco products, e.g. wrapper materials, sheets, imitation leaves, rods, cakes; Forms of such products

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to flavored products intended for human use.
  • the products are configured for oral use and deliver substances such as flavors and/or active ingredients during use.
  • Such products may include tobacco or a product derived from tobacco, or may be tobacco-free alternatives.
  • Such products typically contain flavorants and/or active ingredients such as nicotine, caffeine, botanicals, or cannabidiol.
  • the format of such products can vary, and include pouched products containing a powdered or granular composition, lozenges, pastilles, liquids, gels, emulsions, meltable compositions, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos. 2022/0160675 to Gerardi et al.
  • the present disclosure relates to pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition comprising a plurality of particles, each particle comprising a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant.
  • the stability of flavorants and/or active ingredients that may be volatile and prone to loss from the composition are provided in a more stable form when included in the particles of the composition, which are typically formed by shredding a sheet or extrudate material.
  • use of the particles within the composition can offer different release properties with respect to an active ingredient as compared to other oral product formats.
  • Embodiment 1 A pouched product comprising: an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition comprising a plurality of particles, each particle comprising a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant.
  • Embodiment 2 The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the particles are in the form of a shredded sheet or extrudate material.
  • Embodiment 3 The pouched product of Embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the at least one binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates, pectin, gums, carrageenan, povidone, pullulan, zein, cellulose ethers, starches, dextrans, and combinations thereof.
  • the at least one binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates, pectin, gums, carrageenan, povidone, pullulan, zein, cellulose ethers, starches, dextrans, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 4 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the at least one binder comprises one or more cellulose ethers, such as methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, or a combination thereof.
  • the at least one binder comprises one or more cellulose ethers, such as methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 5 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the at least one filler comprises one or more cellulosic non-tobacco plant materials.
  • Embodiment 6 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 5, wherein the at least one filler comprises microcrystalline cellulose.
  • Embodiment 7 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 6, wherein the binder is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight and/or wherein the filler is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  • Embodiment 8 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 7, wherein each particle further comprises one or more surfactants.
  • Embodiment 9 The pouched product of Embodiment 8, wherein the one or more surfactants are present in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  • Embodiment 10 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 9, wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of pH adjusters, buffering agents, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, preservatives, sweeteners, salts, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 11 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 10, wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of glycerin, propylene glycol, sugar alcohols, non-nutritive sweeteners, sodium chloride, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 12 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, wherein each particle comprises one or more active ingredients selected from the group consisting of a nicotinic component, nutraceuticals, botanicals, stimulants, amino acids, vitamins, cannabinoids, cannabamimetics, terpenes, pharmaceutical agents, and combinations thereof.
  • active ingredients selected from the group consisting of a nicotinic component, nutraceuticals, botanicals, stimulants, amino acids, vitamins, cannabinoids, cannabamimetics, terpenes, pharmaceutical agents, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 13 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 12, wherein each particle comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 14 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 13, wherein each particle comprises: at least one binder in an amount of about 20 to about 70 % by weight; at least one filler in an amount of about 5 to about 20 % by weight; one or more surfactants in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight; at least one flavorant or at least one active ingredient in an amount of about 0.5 to about 20 % by weight; optionally, at least one humectant in an amount of about 5 to about 15 % by weight; and optionally, at least one sweetener in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight.
  • Embodiment 15 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 14, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 ⁇ m.
  • Embodiment 16 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 15, wherein the composition is substantially free of a tobacco material.
  • Embodiment 17 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 16, wherein the composition further comprises at least one additional filler admixed with the plurality of particles.
  • Embodiment 18 The pouched product of Embodiment 17, wherein the at least one additional filler comprises cellulose spheres.
  • Embodiment 19 The pouched product of Embodiment 17 or 18, wherein the at least one additional filler comprises microcrystalline cellulose.
  • Embodiment 20 The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 19, wherein each particle comprises at least one volatile flavor component, such as a flavor component comprising one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof.
  • a volatile flavor component such as a flavor component comprising one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 21 A method of preparing a composition adapted for oral use, comprising:
  • Embodiment 22 The method of Embodiment 21, wherein the mixture further comprises one or more surfactants.
  • Embodiment 23 The method of Embodiment 21 or 22, wherein the mixture comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 24 The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 23, wherein the drying comprises drying the extrudate or sheet to a water level of about 5 to about 25% by weight.
  • Embodiment 25 The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 24, wherein the additional filler material comprises cellulose spheres.
  • Embodiment 26 The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 25, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 ⁇ m after shredding.
  • FIG. 1 is a front perspective view illustrating a pouched product according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • compositions and products provided herein are pouched products, e.g., in the form of a mixture of one or more components dispersed within a moisture-permeable container (e.g., a water-permeable pouch).
  • Pouched products generally comprise, in addition to the pouch-based exterior, a composition/mixture within the pouch that typically comprises one or more active ingredients and/or one or more flavorants, and various other optional ingredients.
  • use of the sheet or extrudate material in an oral product can have several benefits, including flavor longevity and modified active ingredient release.
  • the overall pouch fill density of the product can be better controlled to a desired level.
  • Use of the sheet or extrudate material can also, in some embodiments, enhance the ability to process multiple additives desired in an oral product (e.g., multiple active ingredients or multiple flavorants) by incorporating such materials into a single carrier material.
  • active ingredient e.g., nicotine
  • active ingredient release or dissolution properties can be better controlled by, for example, using multiple sheet or extrudate materials of different composition and/or combining the sheet or extrudate material with other types of oral product components, such as other types of filler components carrying one or more active ingredients.
  • the present disclosure provides potential increased flavor stability in some embodiments through use of a sheet or extrudate material as a flavor carrier having a different (typically lower) pH environment than the remaining components of the oral product.
  • the present disclosure provides potential increased flavor longevity through incorporation of flavorants in the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the presence of a film-forming binder component can bind a volatile flavorant or active ingredient, thereby increasing stability and reducing loss of such volatile components.
  • the sheet or extrudate material can be used as the sole component of the oral product, or the sheet or extrudate material can be combined with other components, such as further filler components, active ingredients, flavorants, and the like.
  • a second particulate material such as a combination of microcrystalline cellulose with one or more active ingredients or flavorants, could be mixed with particles of the sheet or extrudate material within the pouched product.
  • a sheet or extrudate material of the present disclosure is combined with a separate filler component, such as in amounts of sheet/extrudate material of about 50 to about 90% by weight, and separate filler component of about 10 to about 50% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral product (exclusive of the pouch material).
  • a binder (or combination of binders) is employed in the sheet or extrudate material in ar amount sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity.
  • the binder materials can serve to add cohesiveness to a sheet or extrudate material, and can also serve as gelling agents.
  • the amount of binder present is up to about 50% by weight, and some embodiments are characterized by a binder content of at least about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the binder is present in ar amount by weight in a range from about 5 to about 50% based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material, such as from about 5%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, about 25%, or abou 30%, to about 35%, about 40%, or about 45% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Typical binders can be organic or inorganic, or a combination thereof.
  • Representative binders include povidone, sodium alginate, pectin, gums, carrageenan, pullulan, zein, cellulose derivatives, and the like, and combinations thereof.
  • combinations or blends of two or more binder materials may be employed.
  • Other examples of binder materials are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,101,839 to Jakob et al. ; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,924,887 to Raker et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates carrageenan and other seaweed hydrocolloids, exudate gum hydrocolloids, cellulose ethers starches, gums, dextrans, povidone, pullulan, zein, or combinations thereof.
  • the binder is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers) meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group.
  • cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose (“HPC”) hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (“HPMC”), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose (“CMC”).
  • Suitable cellulose ethers include hydroxypropylcellulose, such as Klucel H from Aqualon Co.; hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, such as Methocel K4MS from DuPont hydroxyethylcellulose, such as Natrosol 250 MRCS from Aqualon Co.; methylcellulose, such as Methocel A4M, K4M, and E15 from DuPont.; and sodium carboxymethylcellulose, such as CMC 7HF, CMC 7LF, and CMC 7H4F from Aqualon Co.
  • the binder is one or more cellulose ethers (e.g., a single cellulose ether or a combination of several cellulose ethers, such as two or three, for example).
  • the binder is a cellulose ether selected from the group consisting of methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, and combinations thereof.
  • a surfactant or combination of surfactants can be included in the sheet or extrudate material in order to improve dispersion and mixing of the various components of the material.
  • Surfactant molecules typically comprise both hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions and reduce interfacial tension.
  • Surfactants can be ionic or nonionic.
  • surfactants examples include, but are not limited to, long-chain triglycerides, such as C16-C18 triglycerides, linoleic acid, glyceryl monooleate, sodium lauryl sulfate (sodium dodecyl sulfate, SLS, or SDS), docusate sodium, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester surfactants (including, e.g., mono- and tri-lauryl, palmityl, stearyl and oleyl esters), such as those known as polysorbates and commercially available under the tradename TWEEN ® (e.g TWEEN ® 20, TWEEN ® 40, TWEEN ® 65, TWEEN ® 80, and TWEEN ® 85); polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters, e.g., polyoxyethylene stearic acid esters such as those commercially available under the trade name MYRJ TM (e.g., MYR
  • the amount of surfactant in the disclosed sheet or extrudate materials can vary. In some embodiments, the amount of surfactant is about 1% or greater by weight, about 2% or greater by weight, about 3% or greater by weight, about 4% or greater by weight, about 5% or greater by weight. In some embodiments, the amount of surfactant is no more than about 20% by weight, no more than about 15% by weight, no more than about 10% by weight, or no more than about 8% by weight. Certain, non-limiting ranges include, e.g., about 1% by weight to about 20% by weight about 5% to about 15% by weight, or about 5% to about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • sheet or extrudate materials provided herein typically comprise one or more filler components.
  • Such particulate filler components may fulfill multiple functions, such as enhancing certain organoleptic properties such as texture and mouthfeel, enhancing cohesiveness or compressibility of the product, and the like.
  • filler components are porous, particulate materials and are cellulose-based.
  • suitable particulate filler components are any non-tobacco plant material or derivative thereof, including cellulose materials derived from such sources.
  • cellulosic non-tobacco plant material include cereal grains (e.g., maize, oat, barley, rye, buckwheat, and the like), sugar beet (e.g., FIBREX ® brand filler available from International Fiber Corporation), bran fiber, citrus fiber (e.g., CITRI-FI ® brand fiber available from Fiberstar), and mixtures thereof.
  • Non-limiting examples of derivatives of non-tobacco plant material include starches (e.g., from potato, wheat, rice, corn), natural cellulose, and modified cellulosic materials. Additional examples of potential particulate filler components include maltodextrin, dextrose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, lactose, mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol. Combinations of fillers can also be used.
  • Starch as used herein may refer to pure starch from any source, modified starch, or starch derivatives. Starch is present, typically in granular form, in almost all green plants and in various types of plant tissues and organs (e.g., seeds, leaves, rhizomes, roots, tubers, shoots, fruits, grains, and stems). Starch can vary in composition, as well as in granular shape and size. Often, starch from different sources has different chemical and physical characteristics. A specific starch can be selected for inclusion in the mixture based on the ability of the starch material to impart a specific organoleptic property to composition. Starches derived from various sources can be used.
  • starch major sources include cereal grains (e.g., rice, wheat, and maize) and root vegetables (e.g., potatoes and cassava).
  • sources of starch include acorns, arrowroot, arracacha, bananas, barley, beans (e.g., favas, lentils, mung beans, peas, chickpeas), breadfruit, buckwheat, canna, chestnuts, colacasia, katakuri, kudzu, malanga, millet, oats, oca, Polynesian arrowroot, sago, sorghum, sweet potato, quinoa, rye, tapioca, taro, tobacco, water chestnuts, and yams.
  • modified starches are modified starches.
  • a modified starch has undergone one or more structural modifications, often designed to alter its high heat properties.
  • Some starches have been developed by genetic modifications, and are considered to be “genetically modified” starches.
  • Other starches are obtained and subsequently physically (e.g., heat, cool water swelling, etc.), chemically, or enzymatically modified.
  • modified starches can be starches that have been subjected to chemical reactions, such as esterification, etherification, oxidation, depolymerization (thinning) by acid catalysis or oxidation in the presence of base, bleaching, transglycosylation and depolymerization (e.g., dextrinization in the presence of a catalyst), cross-linking, acetylation, hydroxypropylation, and/or partial hydrolysis.
  • Enzymatic treatment includes subjecting native starches to enzyme isolates or concentrates, microbial enzymes, and/or enzymes native to plant materials, e.g., amylase present in corn kernels to modify corn starch.
  • modified starches are modified by heat treatments, such as pregelatinization, dextrinization, and/or cold water swelling processes.
  • Certain modified starches include monostarch phosphate, distarch glycerol, distarch phosphate esterified with sodium trimetaphosphate, phosphate distarch phosphate, acetylated distarch phosphate, starch acetate esterified with acetic anhydride, starch acetate esterified with vinyl acetate, acetylated distarch adipate, acetylated distarch glycerol, hydroxypropyl starch, hydroxypropyl distarch glycerol, starch sodium octenyl succinate.
  • the filler comprises or is an inorganic material.
  • inorganic fillers include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, and bioceramic materials (e.g., porous hydroxyapatite).
  • the particulate filler component is a cellulose material or cellulose derivative and can, in some embodiments, comprise microcrystalline cellulose ("MCC").
  • MCC microcrystalline cellulose
  • the MCC may be synthetic or semi-synthetic, or it may be obtained entirely from natural celluloses.
  • the MCC may be selected from the group consisting of AVICEL ® grades PH-100, PH-102, PH-103, PH-105, PH-112, PH-113, PH-200, PH-300, PH-302, VIVACEL ® grades 101, 102, 12, 20 and EMOCEL ® grades 50M and 90M, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
  • a particulate filler can be characterized as substantially spherical, such as cellulose spheres.
  • substantially spherical is meant at least a portion of the particulate filler component is in the shape of a sphere and/or is “sphere-like' in shape.
  • substantially spherical encompasses slightly elongated (e.g., oval) shapes, slightly flattened shapes, and the like.
  • Substantially spherical particulate filler components are intended to be distinguished from conventional particulate filler components (e.g., commercially available "fillers” or “particulate fillers” that are not explicitly designed as “spherical”).
  • the substantially spherical filler component comprises MCC. In some embodiments, the substantially spherical filler component comprises solid (although porous) MCC spheres. In some embodiments, the substantially spherical filler component comprises hollow MCC spheres. In some embodiments, the center/core of such hollow MCC spheres may be unfilled; in some embodiments, the center/core of such hollow MCC spheres may be filled with one or more additional components (e.g., flavorants, fillers, active ingredients, etc.).
  • additional components e.g., flavorants, fillers, active ingredients, etc.
  • suitable MCC spheres include, but are not limited to, Vivapur ® MCC spheres from JRS Pharma, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 100-200 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 100), 200-355 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 200), 355-500 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 350), 500-710 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 500), 710-1000 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 700), and 1000-1400 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 1000).
  • Vivapur ® MCC spheres from JRS Pharma, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 100-200 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 100), 200-355 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 200), 355-500 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 350), 500-710 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 500), 710-1000 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 700), and 1000-1400 ⁇ m (Vivapur ® 1000).
  • suitable MCC spheres include, but are not limited to, Celphere TM MCC spheres from Asahi Kasei Corporation, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 75-212 ⁇ m (Celphere TM SCP-100), 106-212 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-102), 150-300 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-203), 300-500 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-305), and 500-710 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-507).
  • Celphere TM MCC spheres from Asahi Kasei Corporation, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 75-212 ⁇ m (Celphere TM SCP-100), 106-212 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-102), 150-300 ⁇ m (Celphere TM CP-203), 300-500 ⁇ m (Celp
  • the average diameter of the substantially spherical particulate filler particles provided herein can vary, and is not particularly limited.
  • the spherical filler particles have an average diameter of about 100 microns to about 1000 microns, such as about 250 microns to about 750 microns.
  • the average diameter is about 100 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 100 microns to about 400 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 200 microns, about 200 microns to about 500 microns, about 200 microns to about 400 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, about 300 microns to about 500 microns, about 300 microns to about 400 microns, or about 400 microns to about 500 microns.
  • the average diameter is about 500 microns to about 1000 microns, e.g., about 500 microns to about 900 microns, about 500 microns to about 800 microns, about 500 microns to about 700 microns, about 500 microns to about 600 microns, about 600 microns to about 1000 microns, about 600 microns to about 900 microns, about 600 microns to about 800 microns, about 600 microns to about 700 microns, about 700 microns to about 1000 microns, about 700 microns to about 900 microns, about 700 microns to about 800 microns, about 800 microns to about 1000 microns, about 800 microns to about 900 microns, or about 900 microns to about 1000 microns.
  • the distribution of diameters around this average diameter can also vary; in some embodiments, the distribution of diameters is close to the listed value (e.g., +/- about 25% of the stated value, +/- about 20% of the stated value, +/- about 15% of the stated value, +/- about 10% of the stated value, +/- about 5% of the stated value, or +/- about 1% of the stated value.
  • the disclosure is not, however, limited to materials with such narrow distributions; in some embodiments, the diameter of the MCC spheres within a given material can vary within a wider range.
  • the amount of filler can vary, but is typically up to about 50 percent of the sheet or extrudate by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate.
  • a typical range of filler (e.g., MCC) within the composition can be from about 5 to about 50% by total weight of the composition, for example, from about 5, about 10, about 15, or about 20 to about 30, about 35, about 40, or about 45 weight percent (e.g., about 5 to about 40 weight percent or about 10 to about 25 weight percent).
  • the filler further comprises a cellulose derivative or a combination of such derivatives.
  • the mixture comprises from about 1% to about 10% of the cellulose derivative by weight, based on the total weight of the composition, with some embodiments comprising about 1 to about 5% by weight of cellulose derivative.
  • the cellulose derivative is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers), meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group.
  • Non-limiting examples of such cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose ("HPC”), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (“HPMC”), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose (“CMC”).
  • the cellulose derivative is one or more of methylcellulose, HPC, HPMC, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and CMC.
  • the cellulose derivative is HPC.
  • the sheet or extrudate comprises from about 0% to about 5% HPC by weight, e.g., about 1% to about 3% HPC by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material by weight.
  • the water content and oven volatiles of the sheet or extrudate or overall composition within the pouched product described herein, prior to use by a consumer of the product, may vary according to the desired properties.
  • the mixture, as present within the product prior to insertion into the mouth of the user is less than about 60 percent by weight of water, and generally is from about 1 to about 60% by weight of water, for example, from about 5 to about 55, about 10 to about 50, about 20 to about 45, or about 25 to about 40 percent water by weight, including water amounts of at least about 5% by weight, at least about 10% by weight, at least about 15% by weight, and at least about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the water content of the oral composition is relatively low, e.g., about 1% to about 12% by weight, such as less than about 10%, less than about 8%, less than about 7%, less than about 6%, less than about 5%, or less than about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the oral composition comprises one or more flavoring agents.
  • a "flavoring agent” or “flavorant” is any flavorful or aromatic substance capable of altering the sensory characteristics associated with the oral product. Examples of sensory characteristics that can be modified by the flavoring agent include taste, mouthfeel, moistness, coolness/heat, and/or fragrance/aroma. Flavoring agents may be natural or synthetic, and the character of the flavors imparted thereby may be described, without limitation, as fresh, sweet, herbal, confectionary, floral, fruity, or spicy.
  • flavors include, but are not limited to, vanilla, coffee, chocolate/cocoa, cream, mint, spearmint, menthol, peppermint, wintergreen, eucalyptus, lavender, cardamon, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, cascarilla, sandalwood, honey, jasmine, ginger, anise, sage, licorice, lemon, orange, apple, peach, lime, cherry, strawberry, melatonin, terpenes, and any combinations thereof. See also, Leffingwell et al., Tobacco Flavoring for Smoking Products, R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company (1972 ), which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Flavorings also may include components that are considered moistening, cooling or smoothening agents, such as eucalyptus or menthol. These flavors may be provided neat (i.e., alone) or in a composite, and may be employed as concentrates or flavor packages (e.g., spearmint and menthol, orange and cinnamon; lime, pineapple, and the like). Representative types of components also are set forth in US Pat. No. 5,387,416 to White et al. ; US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2005/0244521 to Strickland et al. ; and PCT Application Pub. No. WO 05/041699 to Quinter et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In some instances, the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form.
  • the flavoring agent generally comprises at least one volatile flavor component.
  • volatile refers to a chemical substance that forms a vapor readily at ambient temperatures (i.e., a chemical substance that has a high vapor pressure at a given temperature relative to a nonvolatile substance).
  • a volatile flavor component has a molecular weight below about 400 Da, and often include at least one carbon-carbon double bond, carbon-oxygen double bond, or both.
  • the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof.
  • Non-limiting examples of aldehydes include vanillin, ethyl vanillin, p-anisaldehyde, hexanal, furfural, isovaleraldehyde, cuminaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and citronellal.
  • Non-limiting examples of ketones include 1-hydroxy-2-propanone and 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-cyclopentenone-1-one.
  • Non-limiting examples of esters include allyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, ethyl hexanoate, isoamyl acetate, and 3-methylbutyl acetate.
  • Non-limiting examples of terpenes include sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, nerolidol, thujone, myrcene, geraniol, nerol, citronellol, linalool, and eucalyptol.
  • the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more of ethyl vanillin, cinnamaldehyde, sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, or citral.
  • the at least one volatile flavor component comprises ethyl vanillin.
  • the at least one volatile flavor component comprises menthol.
  • the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form.
  • a liquid flavorant is disposed (i.e., adsorbed or absorbed in or on) a porous particulate carrier, for example microcrystalline cellulose, which is then combined with the other composition ingredients.
  • a porous particulate carrier for example microcrystalline cellulose
  • Embodiments with flavorant present in dry form may be advantageous in providing a more homogenous product.
  • the amount of flavoring agent, where present in the oral composition can vary, but is typically up to about 10 weight percent, and some embodiments are characterized by a flavoring agent content of at least about 0.1 weight percent, such as about 0.1 to about 1 weight percent, 0.5 to about 10 weight percent, about 1 to about 6 weight percent, or about 2 to about 5 weight percent, based on the total weight of the oral composition.
  • the amount of flavoring agent present within the composition may vary over a period of time (e.g., during a period of storage after preparation of the composition). For example, certain volatile components present in the mixture may evaporate or undergo chemical transformations, leading to a reduction in the concentration of one or more volatile flavor components. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the composition may include one or more taste modifying agents ("taste modifiers") which may serve to mask, alter, block, or improve the flavor of a composition as described herein.
  • taste modifiers include trigeminal sensates, analgesic or anesthetic herbs, spices, and flavors which produce a perceived cooling (e.g., menthol, eucalyptus, mint), warming (e.g., cinnamon), or painful (e.g., capsaicin) sensation.
  • Certain taste modifiers fall into more than one overlapping category.
  • the taste modifier is a cooling agent, such as WS-3 (N-ethyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-cyclohexane carboxamide), WS-23 (N,2,3-trimethyl-2-propan-2-ylbutanamide), WS-5 (N-[(ethoxycarbonyl)methyl)-p-menthane-3-carboxamide), EVERCOOL TM 180 ((1R,2S,SR)-N-(4-(cyanomethyl)phenyl)menthylcarboxamide ), EVERCOOL TM 190 ((1R,2S,SR)-N-(2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethyl)menthylcarboxamide), or combinations thereof.
  • WS-3 N-ethyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-cyclohexane carboxamide
  • WS-23 N,2,3-trimethyl-2-propan-2-ylbutanamide
  • WS-5 N
  • the taste modifier modifies one or more of bitter, sweet, salty, or sour tastes.
  • the taste modifier targets pain receptors.
  • the composition comprises an active ingredient having a bitter taste, and a taste modifier which masks or blocks the perception of the bitter taste.
  • the taste modifier is a substance which targets pain receptors (e.g., vanilloid receptors) in the user's mouth to mask e.g., a bitter taste of another component (e.g., an active ingredient).
  • the taste modifier is capsaicin.
  • the taste modifier is the amino acid gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA), referenced herein above with respect to amino acids.
  • GABA amino acid gamma-amino butyric acid
  • GABA may suppress the perception of certain tastes, such as bitterness.
  • the composition comprises caffeine and GABA.
  • the taste modifier is adenosine monophosphate (AMP).
  • AMP is a naturally occurring nucleotide substance which can block bitter food flavors or enhance sweetness. It does not directly alter the bitter flavor, but may alter human perception of "bitter” by blocking the associated receptor.
  • the taste modifier is lactisole.
  • Lactisole is an antagonist of sweet taste receptors. Temporarily blocking sweetness receptors may accentuate e.g., savory notes.
  • a representative amount of taste modifier is about 0.01% by weight or more, about 0.1% by weight or more, or about 1.0% by weight or more, but will typically make up less than about 10% by weight of the total weight of the composition, (e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 5%, or about 10% by weight of the total weight of the composition). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the oral composition may further comprise a salt (e.g., alkali metal salts), typically employed in an amount sufficient to provide desired sensory attributes to the mixture.
  • a salt e.g., alkali metal salts
  • suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, ammonium chloride, flour salt, and the like.
  • a representative amount of salt is about 0.25 percent by weight or more, about 1.0 percent by weight or more, or at about 1.5 percent by weight or more, but will typically make up about 10 percent or less of the total weight of the composition, or about 7.5 percent or less or about 5 percent or less (e.g., about 0.5 to about 5 percent by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the composition typically further comprises one or more sweeteners.
  • the sweeteners can be any sweetener or combination of sweeteners, in natural or artificial form, or as a combination of natural and artificial sweeteners.
  • natural sweeteners include isomaltulose, fructose, sucrose, glucose, maltose, mannose, galactose, lactose, stevia, honey, and the like.
  • artificial sweeteners include sucralose, maltodextrin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame K, neotame and the like.
  • the sweetener comprises one or more sugar alcohols.
  • Sugar alcohols are polyols derived from monosaccharides or disaccharides that have a partially or fully hydrogenated form.
  • Sugar alcohols have, for example, about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms and include erythritol, arabitol, ribitol, isomalt, maltitol, dulcitol, iditol, mannitol, xylitol, lactitol, sorbitol, and combinations thereof (e.g., hydrogenated starch hydrolysates).
  • the mixture provided herein can include a sugar alcohol (e.g., xylitol or erythritol) in combination with a lesser amount of artificial or non-nutritive sweetener (e.g., sucralose, aspartame, acesulfame K, or any combination thereof).
  • a representative amount of sweetener may make up from about 0.1 to about 20 percent or more of the of the composition by weight, for example, from about 0.1 to about 1%, from about 1 to about 5%, from about 5 to about 10%, or from about 10 to about 20% of the composition on a weight basis, based on the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • one or more humectants may be employed in the composition.
  • humectants include, but are not limited to, polyols such as glycerin, propylene glycol, and the like.
  • the humectant is typically provided in an amount sufficient to provide desired moisture attributes to the composition.
  • a humectant will typically make up about 20% or less of the weight of the composition or 15% or less of the weight of the composition (e.g., from about 1% to about 20% by weight or about 5% to about 15% by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • a flow aid can also be added to the composition in order to enhance flowability of the composition.
  • exemplary flow aids include microcrystalline cellulose, silica, polyethylene glycol, stearic acid, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, zinc stearate, sodium stearyl fumarate, canauba wax, and combinations thereof.
  • the flow aid is sodium stearyl fumarate.
  • a representative amount of flow aid may make up at least about 0.5 percent or at least about 1 percent, of the total dry weight of the composition.
  • the amount of flow aid within the composition will not exceed about 5 percent, and frequently will not exceed about 3 percent, of the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the composition of the present disclosure can comprise pH adjusters or buffering agents.
  • pH adjusters and buffering agents that can be used include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides (e.g., alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide), and other alkali metal buffers such as metal carbonates (e.g., potassium carbonate or sodium carbonate), or metal bicarbonates such as sodium bicarbonate, and the like.
  • suitable buffers include alkali metal acetates, glycinates, phosphates, glycerophosphates, citrates, carbonates, hydrogen carbonates, borates, or mixtures thereof.
  • the buffering agent or pH adjuster is typically present in an amount less than about 5 percent based on the weight of the composition, for example, from about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, or 0.5% to about 5%, such as, e.g., from about 0.75% to about 4%, from about 0.75% to about 3%, or from about 1% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the buffering agent or pH adjuster is typically present in an amount less than about 5 percent based on the weight of the composition, for example, from about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, or 0.5% to about 5%, such as, e.g., from about 0.75% to about 4%, from about 0.75% to about 3%, or from about 1% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • At least one pH adjuster is added to the sheet or extrudate material to further enhance stability of a volatile flavorant or active ingredient contained therein.
  • sufficient pH adjuster could be added to the sheet or extrudate material to maintain a pH level below 7, such as about 4 to about 7.
  • Oral care ingredients provide the ability to inhibit tooth decay or loss, inhibit gum disease, relieve mouth pain, whiten teeth, or otherwise inhibit tooth staining, elicit salivary stimulation, inhibit breath malodor, freshen breath, or the like.
  • effective amounts of ingredients such as thyme oil, eucalyptus oil and zinc (e.g., such as the ingredients of formulations commercially available as ZYTEX ® from Discus Dental) can be incorporated into the composition.
  • Other examples of ingredients that can be incorporated in desired effective amounts within the present composition can include those that are incorporated within the types of oral care compositions set forth in Takahashi et al., Oral Microbiology and Immunology, 19(1), 61-64 (2004 ); U.S. Pat. No.
  • exemplary ingredients of tobacco containing-formulation include those contained in formulations marketed as MALTISORB ® by Roquette and DENTIZYME ® by NatraRx.
  • a representative amount of oral care additive is at least about 1%, often at least about 3%, and frequently at least about 5% of the total dry weight of the composition.
  • the amount of oral care additive within the composition will not typically exceed about 30%, often will not exceed about 25%, and frequently will not exceed about 20%, of the total weight of the composition.
  • a colorant may optionally be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes to the composition.
  • colorants include various dyes and pigments, such as caramel coloring and titanium dioxide.
  • the amount of colorant utilized in the composition can vary, but when present is typically up to about 3 weight percent, such as from about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%, to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the composition comprises one or more active ingredients.
  • an "active ingredient” refers to one or more substances belonging to any of the following categories: API (active pharmaceutical ingredient), food additives, natural medicaments, and naturally occurring substances that can have an effect on humans.
  • Example active ingredients include any ingredient known to impact one or more biological functions within the body, such as ingredients that furnish pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or which affect the structure or any function of the body of humans (e.g., provide a stimulating action on the central nervous system, have an energizing effect, an antipyretic or analgesic action, or an otherwise useful effect on the body).
  • the active ingredient may be of the type generally referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, "phytochemicals” or “functional foods.”
  • dietary supplements e.g., nutraceuticals, "phytochemicals” or “functional foods.”
  • an active ingredient or combination thereof is present in a total concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 20%.
  • the active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.5% w/w to about 10%, from about 1% to about 10%, from about 1% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is present in a concentration of from about 0.001%, about 0.01%, about 0.1% , or about 1%, up to about 20% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.002%, about 0.003%, about 0.004%, about 0.005%, about 0.006%, about 0.007%, about 0.008%, about 0.009%, about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%,
  • the active ingredient comprises a botanical ingredient.
  • botanical ingredient refers to any plant material or fungal-derived material, including plant material in its natural form and plant material derived from natural plant materials, such as extracts or isolates from plant materials or treated plant materials (e.g., plant materials subjected to heat treatment, fermentation, bleaching, or other treatment processes capable of altering the physical and/or chemical nature of the material).
  • a “botanical” includes, but is not limited to, "herbal materials,” which refer to seed-producing plants that do not develop persistent woody tissue and are often valued for their medicinal or sensory characteristics (e.g., teas or tisanes).
  • compositions as disclosed herein can be characterized as free of any tobacco material (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any tobacco material).
  • substantially free is meant that no tobacco material has been intentionally added.
  • some embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of tobacco, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of tobacco.
  • a botanical When present, a botanical is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the botanical materials useful in the present disclosure may comprise, without limitation, any of the compounds and sources set forth herein, including mixtures thereof. Certain botanical materials of this type are sometimes referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, "phytochemicals” or “functional foods.” Certain botanicals, as the plant material or an extract thereof, have found use in traditional herbal medicine, and are described further herein.
  • Non-limiting examples of botanicals or botanical-derived materials include acai berry ( Euterpe oleracea martius ), acerola ( Malpighia glabra ), alfalfa, allspice, Angelica root, anise (e.g., star anise), annatto seed, apple ( Malus domestica ), apricot oil, ashwagandha, Bacopa monniera, baobab, basil ( Ocimum basilicum ) , bay, bee balm, beet root, bergamot, blackberry ( Morus nigra ) , black cohosh, black pepper, black tea, blueberries, boldo ( Peumus boldus ) , borage, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, camu ( Myrcaria dubia ) , cannabis/hemp, caraway seed, cardamom, cassis, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, Centella asiatica, chaga mushroom
  • the active ingredient comprises lemon balm.
  • Lemon balm ( Melissa officinalis ) is a mildly lemon-scented herb from the same family as mint ( Lamiaceae ) . The herb is native to Europe, North Africa, and West Asia. The tea of lemon balm, as well as the essential oil and the extract, are used in traditional and alternative medicine.
  • the active ingredient comprises lemon balm extract.
  • the lemon balm extract is present in an amount of from about 1 to about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient comprises ginseng.
  • Ginseng is the root of plants of the genus Panax, which are characterized by the presence of unique steroid saponin phytochemicals (ginsenosides) and gintonin. Ginseng finds use as a dietary supplement in energy drinks or herbal teas, and in traditional medicine. Cultivated species include Korean ginseng ( P . ginseng ), South China ginseng ( P. notoginseng ), and American ginseng ( P. quinquefolius ) . American ginseng and Korean ginseng vary in the type and quantity of various ginsenosides present.
  • the ginseng is American ginseng or Korean ginseng.
  • the active ingredient comprises Korean ginseng.
  • ginseng is present in an amount of from about 0.4 to about 0.6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient comprises one or more stimulants.
  • stimulants refers to a material that increases activity of the central nervous system and/or the body, for example, enhancing focus, cognition, vigor, mood, alertness, and the like.
  • Non-limiting examples of stimulants include caffeine, theacrine, theobromine, and theophylline.
  • Theacrine (1,3,7,9-tetramethyluric acid) is a purine alkaloid which is structurally related to caffeine, and possesses stimulant, analgesic, and anti-inflammatory effects.
  • Present stimulants may be natural, naturally derived, or wholly synthetic.
  • certain botanical materials may possess a stimulant effect by virtue of the presence of e.g., caffeine or related alkaloids, and accordingly are “natural” stimulants.
  • the stimulant e.g., caffeine, theacrine
  • caffeine can be obtained by extraction and purification from botanical sources (e.g., tea).
  • whole synthetic it is meant that the stimulant has been obtained by chemical synthesis.
  • the active ingredient comprises caffeine.
  • the caffeine is present in an encapsulated form.
  • Vitashure ® available from Balchem Corp., 52 Sunrise Park Road, New Hampton, NY, 10958.
  • the active ingredient comprises an amino acid.
  • amino acid refers to an organic compound that contains amine (-NH 2 ) and carboxyl (-COOH) or sulfonic acid (SO 3 H) functional groups, along with a side chain (R group), which is specific to each amino acid.
  • Amino acids may be proteinogenic or non-proteinogenic. By “proteinogenic” is meant that the amino acid is one of the twenty naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins.
  • the proteinogenic amino acids include alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine.
  • non-proteinogenic is meant that either the amino acid is not found naturally in protein, or is not directly produced by cellular machinery (e.g., is the product of post-translational modification).
  • Non-limiting examples of non-proteinogenic amino acids include gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), taurine (2-aminoethanesulfonic acid), theanine (L- ⁇ -glutamylethylamide), hydroxyproline, and beta-alanine.
  • the active ingredient comprises theanine.
  • the active ingredient comprises GABA.
  • the active ingredient comprises a combination of theanine and GABA.
  • the active ingredient is a combination of theanine, GABA, and lemon balm.
  • the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine, theanine, and ginseng.
  • the active ingredient comprises taurine.
  • the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine and taurine.
  • an amino acid or combination of amino acids is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient comprises a vitamin or combination of vitamins.
  • vitamin refers to an organic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of metabolism in a mammal.
  • vitamins required by human metabolism which are: vitamin A (as all-trans-retinol, all-trans-retinyl-esters, as well as all-trans-beta-carotene and other provitamin A carotenoids), vitamin B1 (thiamine), vitamin B2 (riboflavin), vitamin B3 (niacin), vitamin B5 (pantothenic acid), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B7 (biotin), vitamin B9 (folic acid or folate), vitamin B12 (cobalamins), vitamin C (ascorbic acid), vitamin D (calciferols), vitamin E (tocopherols and tocotrienols), and vitamin K (quinones).
  • the active ingredient comprises vitamin C. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of vitamin C, caffeine, and taurine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more of vitamin B6 and B12. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises theanine and one or more of vitamin B6 and B12.
  • the active ingredient comprises vitamin A.
  • the vitamin A is encapsulated.
  • the vitamin is vitamin B6, vitamin B12, vitamin E, vitamin C, or a combination thereof.
  • the active ingredient comprises a mineral.
  • mineral refers to an inorganic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of various systems in a mammal.
  • minerals include iron, zinc, copper, selenium, chromium, cobalt, manganese, calcium, phosphorus, sulfur, magnesium, and the like.
  • the active ingredient comprises iron. Suitable sources of iron include, but are not limited to, ferrous salts such as ferrous sulfate and ferrous gluconate. In some embodiments, the iron is encapsulated.
  • a vitamin or mineral is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 6% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, or about 0.1% w/w, to about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5% , or about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient comprises one or more antioxidants.
  • antioxidant refers to a substance which prevents or suppresses oxidation by terminating free radical reactions, and may delay or prevent some types of cellular damage. Antioxidants may be naturally occurring or synthetic. Naturally occurring antioxidants include those found in foods and botanical materials. Non-limiting examples of antioxidants include certain botanical materials, vitamins, polyphenols, and phenol derivatives.
  • Examples of botanical materials which are associated with antioxidant characteristics include without limitation acai berry, alfalfa, allspice, annatto seed, apricot oil, basil, bee balm, wild bergamot, black pepper, blueberries, borage seed oil, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, chaga mushroom, chervil, cinnamon, dark chocolate, potato peel, grape seed, ginseng, gingko biloba, Saint John's Wort, saw palmetto, green tea, black tea, black cohosh, cayenne, chamomile, cloves, cocoa powder, cranberry, dandelion, grapefruit, honeybush, echinacea, garlic, evening primrose, feverfew, ginger, goldenseal, hawthorn, hibiscus flower, jiaogulan, kava, lavender, licorice, marjoram, milk thistle, mints (menthe), oo
  • Such botanical materials may be provided in fresh or dry form, essential oils, or may be in the form of an extracts.
  • the botanical materials (as well as their extracts) often include compounds from various classes known to provide antioxidant effects, such as minerals, vitamins, isoflavones, phytoesterols, allyl sulfides, dithiolthiones, isothiocyanates, indoles, lignans, flavonoids, polyphenols, and carotenoids.
  • Examples of compounds found in botanical extracts or oils include ascorbic acid, peanut endocarb, resveratrol, sulforaphane, beta-carotene, lycopene, lutein, co-enzyme Q, carnitine, quercetin, kaempferol, and the like. See, e.g., Santhosh et al., Phytomedicine, 12(2005) 216-220 , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Non-limiting examples of other suitable antioxidants include citric acid, Vitamin E or a derivative thereof, a tocopherol, epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate, erythorbic acid, sodium erythorbate, 4-hexylresorcinol, theaflavin, theaflavin monogallate A or B, theaflavin digallate, phenolic acids, glycosides, quercitrin, isoquercitrin, hyperoside, polyphenols, catechols, resveratrols, oleuropein, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), tertiary butylhydroquinone (TBHQ), and combinations thereof.
  • a tocopherol epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate
  • erythorbic acid sodium erythorbate
  • 4-hexylresorcinol theaf
  • the pouched products of the present disclosure can include a nicotinic compound.
  • nicotinic compounds and methods for their administration, are set forth in US Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0274628 to Borschke , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • “nicotinic compound” or “source of nicotine” often refers to naturally-occurring or synthetic nicotinic compound unbound from a plant material, meaning the compound is at least partially purified and not contained within a plant structure, such as a tobacco leaf. Most preferably, nicotine is naturally-occurring and obtained as an extract from a Nicotiana species (e.g., tobacco).
  • the nicotine can have the enantiomeric form S(-)-nicotine, R(+)-nicotine, or a mixture of S(-)-nicotine and R(+)-nicotine.
  • the nicotine is in the form of S(-)-nicotine (e.g., in a form that is virtually all S(-)-nicotine) or a racemic mixture composed primarily or predominantly of S(-)-nicotine (e.g., a mixture composed of about 95 weight parts S(-)-nicotine and about 5 weight parts R(+)-nicotine).
  • the nicotine is employed in virtually pure form or in an essentially pure form. Highly preferred nicotine that is employed has a purity of greater than about 95 percent, more preferably greater than about 98 percent, and most preferably greater than about 99 percent, on a weight basis.
  • a nicotine component may be included in the composition in free base form, salt form, as a complex, or as a solvate.
  • nicotine component is meant any suitable form of nicotine (e.g., free base or salt) for providing oral absorption of at least a portion of the nicotine present.
  • the nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base and a nicotine salt.
  • nicotine is in its free base form, which easily can be adsorbed in for example, a microcrystalline cellulose material to form a microcrystalline cellulose-nicotine carrier complex. See, for example, the discussion of nicotine in free base form in US Pat. Pub. No. 2004/0191322 to Hansson , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the nicotine can be employed in the form of a salt.
  • Salts of nicotine can be provided using the types of ingredients and techniques set forth in US Pat. No. 2,033,909 to Cox et al. and Perfetti, Beitrage Tabak Kauutz. Int., 12: 43-54 (1983 ), which are incorporated herein by reference. Additionally, salts of nicotine are available from sources such as Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc. and K&K Laboratories, Division of ICN Biochemicals, Inc.
  • the nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base, a nicotine salt such as hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, monotartrate, bitartrate, sulfate, salicylate, and nicotine zinc chloride.
  • the nicotine component or a portion thereof is a nicotine salt with one or more organic acids, as explained more fully below.
  • the nicotine can be in the form of a resin complex of nicotine, where nicotine is bound in an ion-exchange resin, such as nicotine polacrilex, which is nicotine bound to, for example, a polymethacrilic acid, such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551.
  • an ion-exchange resin such as nicotine polacrilex
  • a polymethacrilic acid such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551.
  • a polymethacrilic acid such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551.
  • a nicotine-polyacrylic carbomer complex such as with Carbopol 974P.
  • nicotine may be present in the form of a nicotine polyacrylic complex.
  • a basic amine-containing oral product configured for oral use which retains the initial basic amine content (e.g., nicotine content) during storage, and which delivers substantially the full amount of basic amine (e.g., nicotine) initially present in the oral product.
  • nicotine or other basic amine is employed in association with at least a portion of an organic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (referred to herein as "ion pairing").
  • the basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the basic amine present in the composition can exist in multiple forms, including ion paired, in solution (i.e., fully solvated), as the free base, as a cation, as a salt, or any combination thereof.
  • the relative amounts of the various components within the oral product composition may vary, and typically are selected so as to provide the desired sensory and performance characteristics to the oral product.
  • the association between the basic amine and at least a portion of the organic acid or the alkali metal salt thereof is in the form of an ion pair between the basic amine and a conjugate base of the organic acid.
  • Ion pairing describes the partial association of oppositely charged ions in relatively concentrated solutions to form distinct chemical species called ion pairs.
  • the strength of the association depends on the electrostatic force of attraction between the positive and negative ions (i.e., a protonated basic amine such as nicotine, and the conjugate base of the organic acid).
  • conjugate base is meant the base resulting from deprotonation of the corresponding acid (e.g., benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid).
  • benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid
  • the basic amine for example nicotine
  • the conjugate base of the organic acid exist at least partially in the form of an ion pair.
  • ion pairing may minimize chemical degradation of the basic amine and/or enhance the oral availability of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine).
  • alkaline pH values e.g., such as from about 7.5 to about 9
  • certain basic amines, for example nicotine are largely present in the free base form, which has relatively low water solubility, and low stability with respect to evaporation and oxidative decomposition, but high mucosal availability.
  • nicotine-organic acid ion pairs of moderate lipophilicity result in favorable stability and absorption properties.
  • Lipophilicity is conveniently measured in terms of logP, the partition coefficient of a molecule between a lipophilic phase and an aqueous phase, usually octanol and water, respectively.
  • An octanol-water partitioning favoring distribution of a basic amine-organic acid ion pair into octanol is predictive of good absorption of the basic amine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
  • alkaline pH values e.g., such as from about 7.5 to about 9
  • nicotine is largely present in the free base form (and accordingly, a high partitioning into octanol)
  • acidic pH values such as from about 6.5 to about 4
  • nicotine is largely present in a protonated form (and accordingly, a low partitioning into octanol).
  • An ion pair between certain organic acids e.g., having a logP value of from about 1.4 to about 8.0. such as from about 1.4 to about 4.5, allows nicotine partitioning into octanol consistent with that predicted for nicotine partitioning into octanol at a pH of 8.4.
  • the extent of ion pairing in the disclosed composition may vary based on, for example, pH, the nature of the organic acid, the concentration of nicotine, the concentration of the organic acid or conjugate base of the organic acid present in the composition, the water content of the composition, the ionic strength of the composition, and the like.
  • ion pairing is an equilibrium process influenced by the foregoing variables. Accordingly, quantification of the extent of ion pairing is difficult or impossible by calculation or direct observation.
  • the presence of ion pairing may be demonstrated through surrogate measures such as partitioning of the nicotine between octanol and water or membrane permeation of aqueous solutions of the basic amine plus organic acids and/or their conjugate bases.
  • the nicotine component when present, is in a concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 10%.
  • the nicotine component is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, calculated as the free base and based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the nicotine component is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 3% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w to about 2.5%, from about 0.1% to about 2.0%, from about 0.1% to about 1.5%, or from about 0.1% to about 1% by weight, calculated as the free base and based on the total weight of the composition.
  • concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 3% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w to about 2.5%, from about 0.1% to about 2.0%, from about 0.1% to about 1.5%, or from about 0.1% to about 1% by weight, calculated as the free base and based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the products or compositions of the disclosure can be characterized as free of any nicotine component (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any nicotine component).
  • substantially free is meant that no nicotine has been intentionally added, beyond trace amounts that may be naturally present in e.g., a botanical material.
  • some embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of nicotine, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of nicotine, calculated as the free base.
  • organic acid refers to an organic (i.e., carbon-based) compound that is characterized by acidic properties.
  • organic acids are relatively weak acids (i.e., they do not dissociate completely in the presence of water), such as carboxylic acids (-CO 2 H) or sulfonic acids (-SO 2 OH).
  • reference to organic acid means an organic acid that is intentionally added.
  • an organic acid may be intentionally added as a specific composition ingredient as opposed to merely being inherently present as a component of another composition ingredient (e.g., the small amount of organic acid which may inherently be present in a composition ingredient, such as a tobacco material).
  • Suitable organic acids will typically have a range of lipophilicities (i.e., a polarity giving an appropriate balance of water and organic solubility). Typically, lipophilicities of suitable organic acids, as indicated by logP, will vary between about 1.4 and about 4.5 (more soluble in octanol than in water). In some embodiments, the organic acid has a logP value of from about 1.5 to about 4.0, e.g., from about 1.5, about 2.0, about 2.5, or about 3.0, to about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, or about 5.0. Particularly suitable organic acids have a logP value of from about 1.7 to about 4, such as from about 2.0, about 2.5, or about 3.0, to about 3.5, or about 4.0.
  • the organic acid has a logP value of about 2.5 to about 3.5. In some embodiments, organic acids outside this range may also be utilized for various purposes and in various amounts, as described further herein below.
  • the organic acid may have a logP value of greater than about 4.5, such as from about 4.5 to about 8.0.
  • certain solvents or solubilizing agents e.g., inclusion in the composition of glycerin or propylene glycol
  • moderately lipophilic organic acids e.g., logP of from about 1.4 to about 4.5
  • partitioning into octanol is predictive of favorable oral availability.
  • the organic acid has a log P value of from about 1.4 to about 4.5, such as about 1.5, about 2, about 2.5, about 3, about 3.5, about 4 or about 4.5.
  • the organic acid has a log P value of from about 2.5 to about 3.5.
  • the organic acid is a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid.
  • the carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid functional group may be attached to any alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group having, for example, from one to twenty carbon atoms (C 1 -C 20 ).
  • the organic acid is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl carboxylic or sulfonic acid.
  • alkyl refers to any straight chain or branched chain hydrocarbon.
  • the alkyl group may be saturated (i.e., having all sp 3 carbon atoms), or may be unsaturated (i.e., having at least one site of unsaturation).
  • unsaturated refers to the presence of a carbon-carbon, sp 2 double bond in one or more positions within the alkyl group.
  • Unsaturated alkyl groups may be mono- or polyunsaturated.
  • Representative straight chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, and n-hexyl.
  • Branched chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, and 2-methylbutyl.
  • Representative unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, and the like.
  • An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to a carbocyclic group, which may be mono- or bicyclic. Cycloalkyl groups include rings having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle or 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle. Examples of monocyclic cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted, and may include one or more sites of unsaturation (e.g., cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl).
  • aryl refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group. Examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl and naphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • Heteroaryl and “heterocycloalkyl” as used herein refer to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system, respectively, in which one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group comprises up to 20 carbon atoms and from 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S.
  • a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (for example, 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (for example, 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S), for example: a bicyclo[4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system.
  • heteroaryl groups include by way of example and not limitation, pyridyl, thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-car
  • heterocycloalkyls include by way of example and not limitation, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, bis-tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, piperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and morpholinyl. Heteroaryl and heterocycloalkyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • Substituted as used herein and as applied to any of the above alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, means that one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a substituent.
  • a group is described as “optionally substituted,” that group can be substituted with one or more of the above substituents, independently selected for each occasion.
  • the substituent may be one or more methyl groups or one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • the organic acid is an alkyl carboxylic acid.
  • alkyl carboxylic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, heptanoic acid, octanoic acid, nonanoic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, dodecanoic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, and the like.
  • the organic acid is an alkyl sulfonic acid.
  • alkyl sulfonic acids include propanesulfonic acid, heptanesulfonic acid, and octanesulfonic acid.
  • the alkyl carboxylic or sulfonic acid is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • Non-limiting examples include glycolic acid, 4-hydroxybutyric acid, and lactic acid.
  • an organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group or more than one sulfonic acid group (e.g ., two, three, or more carboxylic acid groups).
  • Non-limiting examples include oxalic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, and glutaric acid.
  • organic acids containing multiple carboxylic acids e.g., from two to four carboxylic acid groups
  • one or more of the carboxylic acid groups may be esterified.
  • Non-limiting examples include succinic acid monoethyl ester, monomethyl fumarate, monomethyl or dimethyl citrate, and the like.
  • the organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group and one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • Non-limiting examples of such acids include tartaric acid, citric acid, and the like.
  • the organic acid is an aryl carboxylic acid or an aryl sulfonic acid.
  • aryl carboxylic and sulfonic acids include benzoic acid, toluic acids, salicylic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and p -toluenesulfonic acid.
  • organic acids which may be useful in some embodiments include dibenzoyl-L-tartaric acid, 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid (L), aspartic acid (L), alpha-methylbutyric acid, camphoric acid (+), camphor-10-sulfonic acid (+), cinnamic acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane-1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, furoic acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, glucoheptonic acid, gluconic acid, glucuronic acid, glutamic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, isobutyric acid, isovaleric acid, lactobionic acid, lauri
  • suitable acids include, but are not limited to, the list of organic acids in Table 1.
  • Table 1 Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids Acid Name log(P)* benzoic acid 1.9 phenylacetic 1.4 p-toluic acid 2.3 ethyl benzoic acid 2.9 isopropyl benzoic acid 3.5 4-phenylbutyric 2.4 2-(4-Isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid 3.5 2-napthoxyacetic acid 2.5 napthylacetic acid 2.7 heptanoic acid 2.5 octanoic acid 3.05 nonanoic acid 3.5 decanoic acid 4.09 9-deceneoic acid 3.3 2-deceneoic acid 3.8 10-undecenoic acid 3.9 dodecandioic acid 3.2 dodecanoic acid 4.6 myristic acid 5.3 palmitic acid 6.4 stearic acid 7.6 cyclohexanebutanoic acid 3.4 1-heptanesulfonic acid 2.0 1-oc
  • organic acid may further depend on additional properties in addition to consideration of the logP value. For example, an organic acid should be one recognized as safe for human consumption, and which has acceptable flavor, odor, volatility, stability, and the like. Determination of appropriate organic acids is within the purview of one of skill in the art.
  • the organic acid is a mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid or a polycarboxylic acid.
  • the dicarboxylic acid is malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof.
  • the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof.
  • the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, or a combination thereof.
  • the alcohol forming the mono ester of the dicarboxylic acid is a lipophilic alcohol.
  • suitable lipophilic alcohols include, but are not limited to, octanol, menthol, and tocopherol.
  • the organic acid is an octyl mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid, such as monooctyl succinate, monooctyl fumarate, or the like.
  • the organic acid is a monomenthyl ester of a dicarboxylic acid.
  • Certain menthyl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the cooling sensation they may provide upon use of the product comprising the composition.
  • the organic acid is monomenthyl succinate, monomenthyl fumarate, monomenthyl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
  • the organic acid is a monotocopheryl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain tocopheryl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the antioxidant effects they may provide.
  • the organic acid is tocopheryl succinate, tocopheryl fumarate, tocopheryl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
  • the organic acid is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids.
  • Carotenoids are tetraterpenes, meaning that they are produced from 8 isoprene molecules and contain 40 carbon atoms. Accordingly, they are usually lipophilic due to the presence of long unsaturated aliphatic chains, and are generally yellow, orange, or red in color.
  • Certain carotenoid derivatives can be advantageous in oral compositions by virtue of providing both ion pairing and serving as a colorant in the composition.
  • the organic acid is 2 E ,4 E ,6 E ,8 E, 10 E ,12 E ,14 E ,16 Z ,18 E )-20-methoxy-4,8,13,17-tetramethyl-20-oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenoic acid (bixin) or an isomer thereof.
  • Bixin is an apocarotenoid found in annatto seeds from the achiote tree ( Bixa orellana ) , and is the naturally occurring pigment providing the reddish orange color to annatto.
  • Bixin is soluble in fats and alcohols but insoluble in water, and is chemically unstable when isolated, converting via isomerization into the double bond isomer, trans -bixin ( ⁇ -bixin), having the structure:
  • the organic acid is (2 E ,4 E ,6 E ,8 E ,10 E ,12 E ,14 E ,16 E ,18 E )-4,8,13,17-tetramethylicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid (norbixin), a water soluble hydrolysis product of bixin having the structure:
  • more than one organic acid may be present.
  • the composition may comprise two, or three, or four, or more organic acids.
  • an organic acid contemplates mixtures of two or more organic acids.
  • the relative amounts of the multiple organic acids may vary.
  • a composition may comprise equal amounts of two, or three, or more organic acids, or may comprise different relative amounts.
  • certain organic acids e.g., citric acid or myristic acid
  • it is possible to include certain organic acids e.g., citric acid or myristic acid which have a logP value outside the desired range, when combined with other organic acids to provide the desired average logP range for the combination.
  • organic acids in the composition which have logP values outside the desired range for purposes such as, but not limited to, providing desirable organoleptic properties, stability, as flavor components, and the like.
  • certain lipophilic organic acids have undesirable flavor and or aroma characteristics which would preclude their presence as the sole organic acid (e.g., in equimolar or greater quantities relative to nicotine).
  • a combination of different organic acids may provide the desired ion pairing while the concentration of any single organic acid in the composition remains below the threshold which would be found objectionable from a sensory perspective.
  • the composition comprises an organic acid which is a monoester of a dicarboxylic acid or is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids as described herein above, and further comprises an additional organic acid or salt thereof.
  • the additional organic acid is benzoic acid, an alkali metal salt thereof, or a combination thereof.
  • the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid.
  • the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt.
  • Suitable alkali metal salts include lithium, sodium, and potassium.
  • the alkali metal is sodium or potassium.
  • the alkali metal is sodium.
  • the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid.
  • the weight ratio of the organic acid to the sodium salt (or other alkali metal) of the organic acid is from about 0.1 to about 10, such as from about 0.1, about 0.25, about 0.3, about 0.5, about 0.75, or about 1, to about 2, about 5, or about 10.
  • both an organic acid and the sodium salt thereof are added to the other components of the composition, wherein the organic acid is added in excess of the sodium salt, in equimolar quantities with the sodium salt, or as a fraction of the sodium salt.
  • the relative amounts will be determined by the desired pH of the composition, as well as the desired ionic strength.
  • the organic acid may be added in a quantity to provide a desired pH level of the composition, while the alkali metal (e.g., sodium) salt is added in a quantity to provide the desired extent of ion pairing.
  • the quantity of organic acid (i.e., the protonated form) present in the composition, relative to the alkali metal salt or conjugate base form present in the composition will vary according to the pH of the composition and the pKa of the organic acid, as well as according to the actual relative quantities initially added to the composition.
  • the amount of organic acid or alkali metal salt thereof present in the composition, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), may vary. Generally, as the concentration of the organic acid (or the conjugate base thereof) increases, the percent of basic amine (e.g., nicotine) that is ion paired with the organic acid increases. This typically increases the partitioning of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), in the form of an ion pair, into octanol versus water as measured by the logP (the log 10 of the partitioning coefficient).
  • the composition comprises from about 0.05, about 0.1, about 1, about 1.5, about 2, or about 5, to about 10, about 15, or about 20 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), calculated as the free base of the basic amine.
  • the basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the composition comprises from about 2 to about 10, or from about 2 to about 5 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), on a free-base basis.
  • the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof is present in a molar ratio with basic amine (e.g., nicotine) from about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5, to about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, or about 10.
  • basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0, such as from about 4.5 to about 7.0, or from about 5.5 to about 7.0, from about 4.0 to about 5.5, or from about 7.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 4.5, about 5.0, or about 5.5, to about 6.0, or about 6.5.
  • the organic acid is provided in a quantity sufficient to provide a pH of the composition of from about 5.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0, to about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, or about 6.5.
  • a mineral acid e.g., hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, or the like
  • the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
  • the alkali metal salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
  • the organic acid and the basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the organic acid and the basic amine are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such.
  • the organic acid and basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the organic acid and basic amine are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
  • the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
  • the alkali metal salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components.
  • the organic acid and the basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the organic acid and the basic amine are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such.
  • the organic acid and basic amine e.g., nicotine
  • the organic acid and basic amine are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
  • the oral composition comprises nicotine benzoate and sodium benzoate, wherein at least a portion of the nicotine and benzoate ions present are in an ion paired form.
  • the composition comprises nicotine benzoate, sodium benzoate, and an organic acid, an alkali metal salt of an organic acid, or a combination thereof, the organic acid having a logP value from about 1 to about 12, wherein the organic acid is a monoester of a dicarboxylic acid or is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids.
  • the oral composition further comprises a solubility enhancer to increase the solubility of one or more of the organic acid or salt thereof.
  • Suitable solubility enhancers include, but are not limited to, humectants as described herein, such as glycerol or propylene glycol.
  • Cannabinoids found in cannabis include, without limitation: cannabigerol (CBG), cannabichromene (CBC), cannabidiol (CBD), tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), cannabinol (CBN), cannabinodiol (CBDL), cannabicyclol (CBL), cannabivarin (CBV), tetrahydrocannabivarin (THCV), cannabidivarin (CBDV), cannabichromevarin (CBCV), cannabigerovarin (CBGV), cannabigerol monomethyl ether (CBGM), cannabinerolic acid, cannabidiolic acid (CBDA), cannabinol propyl variant (CBNV), cannabitriol (CBO), tetrahydrocannabinolic acid (THCA), and tetrahydrocannabivarinic acid (THCV A).
  • CBD cannabigerol
  • the cannabinoid is selected from tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the primary psychoactive compound in cannabis, and/or cannabidiol (CBD) another major constituent of the plant, but which is devoid of psychoactivity. All of the above compounds can be used in the form of an isolate from plant material or synthetically derived.
  • the cannabinoid e.g., CBD
  • CBD cannabinoid
  • An isolate is an extract from a plant, such as cannabis, where the active material of interest (in this case the cannabinoid, such as CBD) is present in a high degree of purity, for example greater than 95%, greater than 96%, greater than 97%, greater than 98%, or around 99% purity.
  • the cannabinoid is an isolate of CBD in a high degree of purity, and the amount of any other cannabinoid in the composition is no greater than about 1% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.5% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.01% by weight of the composition.
  • the active ingredient can be a cannabimimetic, which is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids.
  • cannabimimetic is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids. Examples include yangonin, alpha-amyrin or beta-amyrin (also classified as terpenes), cyanidin, curcumin (tumeric), catechin, quercetin, salvinorin A, N-acylethanolamines, and N-alkylamide lipids.
  • a cannabinoid e.g., CBD
  • cannabimimetic is typically in a concentration of at least about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.1% to about 30%, such as, e.g., from about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, or about 30% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the choice of cannabinoid and the particular percentages thereof which may be present within the disclosed composition will vary depending upon the desired flavor, texture, and other characteristics of the composition.
  • terpenes Active ingredients suitable for use in the present disclosure can also be classified as terpenes, many of which are associated with biological effects, such as calming effects.
  • Terpenes are understood to have the general formula of (CsHs)n and include monoterpenes, sesquiterpenes, and diterpenes.
  • Terpenes can be acyclic, monocyclic or bicyclic in structure. Some terpenes provide an entourage effect when used in combination with cannabinoids or cannabimimetics.
  • Examples include beta-caryophyllene, linalool, limonene, beta-citronellol, linalyl acetate, pinene (alpha or beta), geraniol, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, and germacrene, which may be used singly or in combination.
  • the terpene is a terpene derivable from a phytocannabinoid producing plant, such as a plant from the strain of the cannabis sativa species, such as hemp.
  • Suitable terpenes in this regard include so-called “C10" terpenes, which are those terpenes comprising 10 carbon atoms, and so-called “C15” terpenes, which are those terpenes comprising 15 carbon atoms.
  • the active ingredient comprises more than one terpene.
  • the active ingredient may comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten or more terpenes as defined herein.
  • the terpene is selected from pinene (alpha and beta), geraniol, linalool, limonene, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, germacrene and mixtures thereof.
  • the active ingredient comprises an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API).
  • API can be any known agent adapted for therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic use. These can include, for example, synthetic organic compounds, proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcholine, dopamine, melatonin), and nucleic acid sequences, having therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic activity.
  • synthetic organic compounds proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcho
  • Non-limiting examples of APIs include analgesics and antipyretics (e.g., acetylsalicylic acid, acetaminophen, 3-(4-isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid), phosphatidylserine, myoinositol, docosahexaenoic acid (DHA, Omega-3), arachidonic acid (AA, Omega-6), S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), beta-hydroxy-beta-methylbutyrate (HMB), citicoline (cytidine-5'-diphosphate-choline), and cotinine.
  • the active ingredient comprises citicoline.
  • the active ingredient is a combination of citicoline, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises sunflower lecithin. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of sunflower lecithin, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng.
  • an API when present, is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, or about 1%, to about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • the composition is substantially free of any API.
  • substantially free of any API means that the composition does not contain, and specifically excludes, the presence of any API as defined herein, such as any Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved therapeutic agent intended to treat any medical condition.
  • FDA Food and Drug Administration
  • the composition may include a tobacco material.
  • the tobacco material can vary in species, type, and form. Generally, the tobacco material is obtained from for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species.
  • Example Nicotiana species include N. tabacum, N. rustica, N. alata, N. arentsii, N. excelsior, N. forgetiana, N. glauca, N. glutinosa, N. gossei, N. kawakamii, N. knightiana, N. langsdorffi, N. otophora, N. setchelli, N. sylvestris, N. tomentosa, N. tomentosiformis, N. undulata, N.
  • Nicotiana species from which suitable tobacco materials can be obtained can be derived using genetic-modification or crossbreeding techniques (e.g., tobacco plants can be genetically engineered or crossbred to increase or decrease production of components, characteristics or attributes). See, for example, the types of genetic modifications of plants set forth in US Pat. Nos. 5,539,093 to Fitzmaurice et al. ; 5,668,295 to Wahab et al. ; 5,705,624 to Fitzmaurice et al. ; 5,844,119 to Weigl ; 6,730,832 to Dominguez et al. ; 7,173,170 to Liu et al. ; 7,208,659 to Colliver et al.
  • genetic-modification or crossbreeding techniques e.g., tobacco plants can be genetically engineered or crossbred to increase or decrease production of components, characteristics or attributes. See, for example, the types of genetic modifications of plants set forth in US Pat. Nos. 5,
  • the Nicotiana species can, in some embodiments, be selected for the content of various compounds that are present therein. For example, plants can be selected on the basis that those plants produce relatively high quantities of one or more of the compounds desired to be isolated therefrom.
  • plants of the Nicotiana species e.g., Galpao commun tobacco
  • the plant of the Nicotiana species can be included within a mixture as disclosed herein.
  • virtually all of the plant e.g ., the whole plant
  • various parts or pieces of the plant can be harvested or separated for further use after harvest.
  • the flower, leaves, stem, stalk, roots, seeds, and various combinations thereof, can be isolated for further use or treatment.
  • the tobacco material comprises tobacco leaf (lamina).
  • the mixture disclosed herein can include processed tobacco parts or pieces, cured and aged tobacco in essentially natural lamina and/or stem form, a tobacco extract, extracted tobacco pulp (e.g., using water as a solvent), or a mixture of the foregoing (e.g., a mixture that combines extracted tobacco pulp with granulated cured and aged natural tobacco lamina).
  • the tobacco material comprises solid tobacco material selected from the group consisting of lamina and stems.
  • the tobacco that is used for the mixture most preferably includes tobacco lamina, or a tobacco lamina and stem mixture (of which at least a portion is smoke-treated).
  • Portions of the tobaccos within the mixture may have processed forms, such as processed tobacco stems (e.g., cut-rolled stems, cut-rolled-expanded stems or cut-puffed stems), or volume expanded tobacco (e.g., puffed tobacco, such as dry ice expanded tobacco (DIET)).
  • DIET dry ice expanded tobacco
  • the d mixture optionally may incorporate tobacco that has been fermented. See, also, the types of tobacco processing techniques set forth in PCT WO2005/063060 to Atchley et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • the tobacco material is typically used in a form that can be described as particulate (i.e., shredded, ground, granulated, or powder form).
  • the manner by which the tobacco material is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary.
  • plant parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a particulate form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like.
  • the plant material is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like.
  • tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent or less than about 5 weight percent.
  • the tobacco material is employed in the form of parts or pieces that have an average particle size between 1.4 millimeters and 250 microns.
  • the tobacco particles may be sized to pass through a screen mesh to obtain the particle size range required.
  • air classification equipment may be used to ensure that small sized tobacco particles of the desired sizes, or range of sizes, may be collected.
  • differently sized pieces of granulated tobacco may be mixed together.
  • tobacco parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a powder type of form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like.
  • the tobacco is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like.
  • tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent to less than about 5 weight percent.
  • the tobacco plant or portion thereof can be separated into individual parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be removed from the stems, and/or the stems and leaves can be removed from the stalk).
  • the harvested plant or individual parts or pieces can be further subdivided into parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be shredded, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled or ground into pieces or parts that can be characterized as filler-type pieces, granules, particulates or fine powders).
  • the plant, or parts thereof can be subjected to external forces or pressure (e.g., by being pressed or subjected to roll treatment).
  • the plant or portion thereof can have a moisture content that approximates its natural moisture content (e.g., its moisture content immediately upon harvest), a moisture content achieved by adding moisture to the plant or portion thereof, or a moisture content that results from the drying of the plant or portion thereof.
  • powdered, pulverized, ground or milled pieces of plants or portions thereof can have moisture contents of less than about 25 weight percent, often less than about 20 weight percent, and frequently less than about 15 weight percent.
  • tobacco materials that can be employed include flue-cured or Virginia (e.g., K326), burley, sun-cured (e.g., Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos, including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos), Maryland, dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passanda, Cubano, Jatin and Bezuki tobaccos), light air cured (e.g., North Wisconsin and Galpao tobaccos), Indian air cured, Red Russian and Rustica tobaccos, as well as various other rare or specialty tobaccos and various blends of any of the foregoing tobaccos.
  • flue-cured or Virginia e.g., K326)
  • burley sun-cured
  • Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos
  • Maryland dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passand
  • the tobacco material may also have a so-called "blended" form.
  • the tobacco material may include a mixture of parts or pieces of flue-cured, burley (e.g., Malawi burley tobacco) and Oriental tobaccos (e.g., as tobacco composed of, or derived from, tobacco lamina, or a mixture of tobacco lamina and tobacco stem).
  • a representative blend may incorporate about 30 to about 70 parts burley tobacco (e.g., lamina, or lamina and stem), and about 30 to about 70 parts flue cured tobacco (e.g., stem, lamina, or lamina and stem) on a dry weight basis.
  • example tobacco blends incorporate about 75 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 15 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 25 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 10 parts burley tobacco, and about 25 parts Oriental tobacco; on a dry weight basis.
  • Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 20 to about 30 parts Oriental tobacco and about 70 to about 80 parts flue-cured tobacco on a dry weight basis.
  • Tobacco materials used in the present disclosure can be subjected to, for example, fermentation, bleaching, and the like.
  • the tobacco materials can be, for example, irradiated, pasteurized, or otherwise subjected to controlled heat treatment.
  • controlled heat treatment processes are detailed, for example, in US Pat. No. 8,061,362 to Mua et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • tobacco materials can be treated with water and an additive capable of inhibiting reaction of asparagine to form acrylamide upon heating of the tobacco material (e.g., an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di- and trivalent cations, asparaginase, certain non-reducing saccharides, certain reducing agents, phenolic compounds, certain compounds having at least one free thiol group or functionality, oxidizing agents, oxidation catalysts, natural plant extracts (e.g., rosemary extract), and combinations thereof.
  • an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di
  • the type of tobacco material is selected such that it is initially visually lighter in color than other tobacco materials to some degree (e.g., whitened or bleached).
  • Tobacco pulp can be whitened in some embodiments according to any means known in the art.
  • bleached tobacco material produced by various whitening methods using various bleaching or oxidizing agents and oxidation catalysts can be used.
  • Example oxidizing agents include peroxides (e.g., hydrogen peroxide), chlorite salts, chlorate salts, perchlorate salts, hypochlorite salts, ozone, ammonia, potassium permanganate, and combinations thereof.
  • Example oxidation catalysts are titanium dioxide, manganese dioxide, and combinations thereof.
  • the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness of at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or at least about 80%. In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness in the range of about 50% to about 90%, about 55% to about 75%, or about 60% to about 70%. ISO brightness can be measured according to ISO 3688:1999 or ISO 2470-1:2016.
  • the whitened tobacco material can be characterized as lightened in color (e.g., "whitened") in comparison to an untreated tobacco material.
  • White colors are often defined with reference to the International Commission on Illumination's (CIE's) chromaticity diagram.
  • CIE's International Commission on Illumination's
  • the whitened tobacco material can, in some embodiments, be characterized as closer on the chromaticity diagram to pure white than an untreated tobacco material.
  • the tobacco material can be treated to extract a soluble component of the tobacco material therefrom.
  • tobacco extract refers to the isolated components of a tobacco material that are extracted from solid tobacco pulp by a solvent that is brought into contact with the tobacco material in an extraction process.
  • extraction techniques of tobacco materials can be used to provide a tobacco extract and tobacco solid material. See, for example, the extraction processes described in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2011/0247640 to Beeson et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Other example techniques for extracting components of tobacco are described in US Pat. Nos. 4,144,895 to Fiore ; 4,150,677 to Osborne, Jr. et al.
  • Typical inclusion ranges for tobacco materials can vary depending on the nature and type of the tobacco material, and the intended effect on the final composition, with an example range of up to about 30% by weight (or up to about 20% by weight or up to about 10% by weight or up to about 5% by weight), based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 15% by weight).
  • a tobacco material e.g., a whitened tobacco material
  • a relatively small amount e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.1% by weight.
  • additives can be included in the disclosed composition.
  • the composition can be processed, blended, formulated, combined and/or mixed with other materials or ingredients.
  • the additives can be artificial, or can be obtained or derived from herbal or biological sources.
  • further types of additives include additional thickening or gelling agents (e.g., fish gelatin), emulsifiers, preservatives (e.g., potassium sorbate and the like), zinc or magnesium salts selected to be relatively water soluble for compositions with greater water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc gluconate) or selected to be relatively water insoluble for compositions with reduced water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc oxide), disintegration aids, or combinations thereof.
  • additional thickening or gelling agents e.g., fish gelatin
  • emulsifiers e.g., preservatives (e.g., potassium sorbate and the like)
  • zinc or magnesium salts selected to be relatively water soluble for compositions with greater water solubility
  • Typical inclusion ranges for such additional additives can vary depending on the nature and function of the additive and the intended effect on the final composition, with an example range of up to about 10% by weight, based on total weight of the composition (e.g., about 0.1 to about 5% by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • the aforementioned additives can be employed together (e.g., as additive formulations) or separately (e.g., individual additive components can be added at different stages involved in the preparation of the final composition). Furthermore, the aforementioned types of additives may be encapsulated as provided in the final product. Example encapsulated additives are described, for example, in WO2010/132444 to Atchley, which has been previously incorporated by reference herein.
  • the oral product includes particles of a material originally prepared in sheet form.
  • a sheet material could be made using cast sheet technology.
  • a cast sheet disclosed herein may be prepared by combining the individual material ingredients (e.g., binder, filler, active ingredient, and flavorant) to form a slurry (10-40% w/w) in water, which may be cast or dispensed onto a surface (such as, for example, a moving stainless steel belt or Mylar ® brand carrier surface). The cast slurry may then experience one or more drying and/or doctoring steps such that the result is a relatively consistent thickness cast sheet.
  • a slurry (10-40% w/w
  • the cast slurry may then experience one or more drying and/or doctoring steps such that the result is a relatively consistent thickness cast sheet.
  • Other examples of casting and paper-making techniques are set forth in U.S. Pat. No.
  • the various components of the mixture may vary.
  • the components noted above which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients.
  • the various components of the mixture may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art. Any mixing method that brings the mixture ingredients into intimate contact can be used, such as a mixing apparatus featuring an impeller or other structure capable of agitation.
  • mixing equipment examples include casing drums, conditioning cylinders or drums, liquid spray apparatus, conical-type blenders, ribbon blenders, mixers available as FKM130, FKM600, FKM1200, FKM2000 and FKM3000 from Littleford Day, Inc., Plough Share types of mixer cylinders, Hobart mixers, and the like. See also, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in US Pat. Nos. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al. ; 6,510,855 to Korte et al. ; and 6,834,654 to Williams , each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Manners and methods for formulating mixtures will be apparent to those skilled in the art. See, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in US Pat. No.
  • the thickness of the resulting sheet form may vary.
  • the term "thickness" describes the shortest distance between a first surface and a second surface.
  • the sheet material may have a thickness of about 0.015 mm to about 10 mm.
  • the thickness may be in the range of about 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm or 0.15 mm to about 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 0.5 mm or 0.3 mm.
  • the flat sheet has a thickness from about 0.3 to about 0.8 mm.
  • the oral product includes particles of a material originally prepared in extruded form using extrusion technology.
  • an extruded material disclosed herein may be prepared by combining the individual ingredients (e.g., binder, filler, active ingredient, and flavorant), to form a dough or agglomerated mass, and extruding the dough.
  • the manner by which the various ingredients are combined may vary.
  • the components noted above which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients.
  • the various ingredients of the material may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art, such as the mixing equipment and technology noted above.
  • the dough or agglomerate is then extruded.
  • the extrusion can be carried out using extruders such as screw, auger, injection molding, sieve, basket, roll, and ram-type extruders, extruding the agglomerate through suitably sized and shaped die apertures.
  • the dough is extruded into a sheet form on a twin-screw extruder using a 0.8 mm thick by 1.25 inches wide die.
  • the dough is extruded into sheet form, followed by rolling between cylinders (size press).
  • the resulting cast sheet or extrudate material may optionally be dried to remove at least a portion of the liquid content (e.g., water).
  • the final water content may be from about 5 to about 25% by weight (e.g., about 8-21% by weight) by weight on a wet basis.
  • flavorants, humectants, and the like can be added to the material after drying.
  • the sheet or extrudate material may be cut into smaller pieces or particles to enhance the ability to use the material with conventional pouching equipment using any cutting or shredding technique known in the art.
  • the material may be shredded or cut into strips, such as by applying about 50 to 150 cuts per inch to a sheet material using a series of blades arranged in parallel.
  • the shredding cut width and length can be altered as desired, such as to achieve densities higher or lower than a conventional pouch fill such as, for example, a pouch containing MCC filler only.
  • the particle size of the sheet or extrudate material after the sizing operation can vary, and can be measured by sieve analysis.
  • sieve analysis is a method used to measure the particle size distribution of a particulate material.
  • sieve analysis involves a nested column of sieves which comprise screens, preferably in the form of wire mesh cloths. A pre-weighed sample may be introduced into the top or uppermost sieve in the column, which has the largest screen openings or mesh size (i.e., the largest pore diameter of the sieve). Each lower sieve in the column has progressively smaller screen openings or mesh sizes than the sieve above.
  • a receiver portion to collect any particles having a particle size smaller than the screen opening size or mesh size of the bottom or lowermost sieve in the column (which has the smallest screen opening or mesh size).
  • the column of sieves may be placed on or in a mechanical agitator.
  • the agitator causes the vibration of each of the sieves in the column.
  • the mechanical agitator may be activated for a pre-determined period of time in order to ensure that all particles are collected in the correct sieve.
  • the column of sieves is agitated for a period of time from 0.5 minutes to 10 minutes, such as from 1 minute to 10 minutes, such as from 1 minute to 5 minutes, such as for approximately 3 minutes.
  • the screen opening sizes or mesh sizes for each sieve in the column used for sieve analysis may be selected based on the granularity or known maximum/minimum particle sizes of the sample to be analysed.
  • a column of sieves may be used for sieve analysis, wherein the column comprises from 2 to 20 sieves, such as from 5 to 15 sieves.
  • any particulate material referenced herein such as particles derived from a sheet or extrudate material, can be characterized as having at least 40% by weight of particles (e.g., at least 50% by weight or at least about 60% by weight) of particles with a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 ⁇ m, such as no greater than about 900 ⁇ m or such as no greater than about 850 ⁇ m.
  • At least 50% by weight, such as at least 60% by weight, such as at least 70% by weight, such as at least 80% by weight, such as at least 90% by weight, such as at least 95% by weight, such as at least 99% by weight of the particles of any particulate material referenced herein have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of from about 0.01 ⁇ m to about 1200 ⁇ m, such as from about 0.05 ⁇ m to about 1000 ⁇ m, such as from about 0.1 ⁇ m to about 900 ⁇ m, such as from about 0.25 ⁇ m to about 850 ⁇ m.
  • the average particle size of any particulate material referenced herein, such as particles derived from a sheet or extrudate material is about 100 microns to about 1000 microns, such as about 250 microns to about 750 microns.
  • the average particle size is about 100 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 100 microns to about 400 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 200 microns, about 200 microns to about 500 microns, about 200 microns to about 400 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, about 300 microns to about 500 microns, about 300 microns to about 400 microns, or about 400 microns to about 500 microns.
  • the average particle size is about 500 microns to about 1000 microns, e.g., about 500 microns to about 900 microns, about 500 microns to about 800 microns, about 500 microns to about 700 microns, about 500 microns to about 600 microns, about 600 microns to about 1000 microns, about 600 microns to about 900 microns, about 600 microns to about 800 microns, about 600 microns to about 700 microns, about 700 microns to about 1000 microns, about 700 microns to about 900 microns, about 700 microns to about 800 microns, about 800 microns to about 1000 microns, about 800 microns to about 900 microns, or about 900 microns to about 1000 microns.
  • the particles of sheet or extrudate material can be combined with other oral product composition ingredients, such as additional filler components and the like. This combination can be accomplished using any known mixing methods and equipment, including methods and equipment noted herein previously. Once the final composition is mixed, placement within a pouch can occur.
  • a moisture-permeable packet or pouch can act as a container for use of the composition within.
  • the pouch provides a liquid-permeable container of a type that may be considered to be similar in character to the mesh-like type of material that is used for the construction of a tea bag. If desired, flavoring ingredients, disintegration aids, and other desired components, may be incorporated within, or applied to, the pouch material.
  • the composition/construction of such packets or pouches, such as the container pouch 20 illustrated in FIG. 1 can vary.
  • the pouches can be formed from a fleece material, e.g., fibrous nonwoven webs.
  • a "fleece material" as used herein may be formed from various types of fibers (e.g., cellulosic fibers, such as viscose fibers, regenerated cellulose fibers, cellulose fibers, and wood pulps; cotton fibers; other natural fibers; or polymer/synthetic-type fibers; or combinations thereof) capable of being formed into a traditional fleece fabrics or other traditional pouch materials.
  • fleece materials may be provided in the form of a woven or nonwoven fabric. Suitable types of fleece materials, for example, are described in U.S. Patent No. 8,931,493 to Sebastian et al. ; US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0000140 to Sebastian et al. ; and US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0073689 to Sebastian et al. ; which are all incorporated herein by reference.
  • nonwoven is used herein in reference to fibrous materials, webs, mats, batts, or sheets in which fibers are aligned in an undefined or random orientation.
  • the nonwoven fibers are initially presented as unbound fibers or filaments.
  • An important step in the manufacturing of nonwovens involves binding the various fibers or filaments together.
  • the manner in which the fibers or filaments are bound can vary, and include thermal, mechanical and chemical techniques that are selected in part based on the desired characteristics of the final product, as discussed in more detail below.
  • the pouch material can be dissolvable (i.e., orally ingestible) such that under conditions of normal use (i.e., upon contact with saliva in the mouth of a user), the pouch material dissolves.
  • the pouch material will dissolve after a significant amount of the soluble components of the composition within the pouch (e.g., active ingredient(s) and/or flavorant(s)) permeate through the pouch material into the mouth of the user.
  • the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate such that the pouch material holds the composition together for a period of time sufficient to allow for the release of substantially all water-soluble components.
  • the composition within the pouch material can also be dissolvable.
  • the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate similar to the rate at which the composition dissolves.
  • the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in about 5 minutes or longer, about 15 minutes or longer, about 30 minutes or longer, or about an hour or longer.
  • the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in no less than 30 minutes, no less than 45 minutes, or no less than an hour.
  • the pouch material may be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in a time of about 30 seconds to about 30 minutes, about 1 minute to about 25 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes.
  • a pouched product comprising a dissolvable pouch material can provide environmental advantages.
  • dissolvable pouch materials can include, but are not limited to, spun or nonwoven alginate fibers, gluten fibers, mini-perforated flat sheets derived from alginate, carrageenan, and other polymer binders, and combinations thereof.
  • the dissolution rate of the pouch material can be controlled by the use of crosslinking technology between alginate or pectin and calcium salts, for example.
  • the dissolvable pouch material can include fast dissolving fibers formed using an electrospinning process (e.g ., solution-based electrospinning) with hydrophilic polymers. See, e.g.
  • the fibers within the fleece material may include, but are not limited to, a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polyhydroxyalkanoates, polycaprolactone, polybutylene succinate, polybutylene succinate adipate, and copolymers thereof.
  • the fibers within the fleece material may be selected from the groups consisting of wool, cotton, fibers made of cellulosic material, such as regenerated cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose nitrate, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl hydroxypropyl cellulose, protein fibers, and the like. See also, the fiber types set forth in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0083438 to Sebastian et al. , which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the pouch material can include a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, and combinations thereof.
  • Regenerated cellulose fibers can be particularly advantageous, and are typically prepared by extracting non-cellulosic compounds from wood, contacting the extracted wood with caustic soda, followed by carbon disulfide and then by sodium hydroxide, giving a viscous solution. The solution is subsequently forced through spinneret heads to create viscous threads of regenerated fibers.
  • Example methods for the preparation of regenerated cellulose are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,274 to Leoni et al ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,666 to Baldini et al ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,252,766 to Baldini et al.
  • the manner in which the regenerated cellulose is made is not limiting, and can include, for example, both the rayon and the TENCEL processes.
  • Various suppliers of regenerated cellulose are known, including Lenzing (Austria), Cordenka (Germany), Aditya Birla (India), and Daicel (Japan).
  • the fibers used in the nonwoven web according to the present disclosure can vary, and include fibers having any type of cross-section, including, but not limited to, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, and multilobal.
  • the fibers can have one or more void spaces, wherein the void spaces can have, for example, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, or multilobal cross-sections.
  • the fibers can be selected from single-component (i.e.
  • fibers having a sheath/core structure and fibers having an islands-in-the-sea structure as well as fibers having a side-by-side, segmented pie, segmented cross, segmented ribbon, or tipped multilobal cross-sections.
  • the physical parameters of the fibers present in the nonwoven web can vary.
  • the fibers used in the nonwoven web can have varying size (e.g., length, dpf) and crimp characteristics.
  • fibers used in the nonwoven web can be nano fibers, submicron fibers, and/or micron-sized fibers.
  • fibers of the nonwoven webs useful herein can measure about 1.5 dpf to about 2.0 dpf, or about 1.6 dpf to about 1.90 dpf.
  • each fiber can be a staple fiber.
  • Each fiber length can measure about 35 mm to about 60 mm, or about 38 mm to about 55 mm, for example.
  • each fiber can measure about 4-10 crimps per cm, or about 5-8 crimps per cm. It can be advantageous for all fibers in the nonwoven web to have similar fiber size and crimp attributes to ensure favorable blending and orientation of the fibers in the nonwoven web.
  • the fibrous webs can have varying thicknesses, porosities and other parameters.
  • the nonwoven web can be formed such that the fiber orientation and porosity of the pouched product formed therefrom can retain the composition adapted for oral use that is enclosed within the outer water-permeable pouch, but can also allow the flavors of the composition to be enjoyed by the consumer.
  • the fibrous webs can have a basis weight of about 20 gsm to about 60 gsm, about 20 gsm to about 35 gsm, or about 25 gsm to about 30 gsm. In a preferred embodiment, the fibrous web can have a basis weight of about 28 gsm.
  • Basis weight of a fabric can be measured using ASTM D3776/D3776M-09a(2013) (Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric), for example.
  • the fibrous web can have a thickness of about 0.1 mm to about 0.15 mm (e.g., about 0.11 mm).
  • the fibrous web can have an elongation of about 70% to about 80%, e.g., about 78%.
  • the fibrous web can have a peak load of about 4 lbs. to about 8 lbs., e.g., about 5.5 lbs.
  • Elongation and breaking strength of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D5034-09(2013) (Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)), for example.
  • the fibrous web can have a Tensile Energy Absorption (TEA) of about 35 to about 40, e.g., about 37.
  • the fibrous web can have a porosity of greater than about 10,000 ml/min/cm 2 .
  • TEA can be measured, for example, as the work done to break the specimen under tensile loading per lateral area of the specimen.
  • Porosity, or air permeability of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D737-04(2012) (Standard Test method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics), for example.
  • the outer water-permeable pouch is made from a nonwoven web as described above.
  • a pouch is constructed of a single layer of the nonwoven web.
  • the pouch material comprises a multilayer composite made up of two or more nonwoven layers, each layer being orally ingestible. Each nonwoven layer can be formed by processes discussed below.
  • a first layer can be relatively hydrophilic and a second layer can be relatively hydrophobic (compared to each other).
  • an outer water-permeable pouch can comprise an outer hydrophilic layer and an inner hydrophobic layer that can be in contact with the composition adapted for oral use.
  • the hydrophobic layer can, during storage of the pouched product, retain any moisture in the composition adapted for oral use such that flavors in the composition are not lost due to moisture loss.
  • capillaries in the hydrophobic layer can wick out moisture into the mouth of the user, such that flavors are released into the oral cavity when used.
  • the pouch material can enhance storage stability without significantly compromising the enjoyment of the product by the end user.
  • the relatively hydrophilic layer could be located on the interior of the multi-layer structure.
  • the two layers can be formed into a multi-layer composite nonwoven material using any means known in the art, such as by attaching the two layers together using adhesive or stitching.
  • the hydrophobicity of a textile material can be evaluated, for example, by measuring the contact angles between a drop of liquid and the surface of a textile material, as is known in the art.
  • the pouch material can comprise a flavor component which can be applied to the nonwoven layer in any conventional manner such as by coating, printing, and the like.
  • the flavor within an outer pouch material can differ from a flavor contained within the internal composition adapted for oral use.
  • a heat sealable binder coating or a binder material may be added to the fibers prior to, during, or after forming the fleece material.
  • heat sealable binder coatings refers to coating materials, such as acrylic polymer compositions, applied to a substrate (e.g., a nonwoven web or fleece material) and which are capable of sealing seams of individual pouches upon heating.
  • a binder material can be added to the web fibers before or during the laying of the fibrous web (i.e., before the fibrous web is bonded to form a fleece material).
  • a binder material can be added to the fleece material after it has been formed.
  • the binder material is in the form of a liquid coating.
  • a binding powder can be applied to the fleece material.
  • powdered polyethylene can be used as a binder material.
  • the liquid or powder coating can be applied, for example, between layers of fibers when cross-laying, air laying, or as an after treatment. A short exposure in an oven is sufficient to melt and fuse the binder material.
  • the apparatus further includes equipment for supplying pouched material to the continuous tubular member such that, when the continuous tubular member is subdivided and sealed into discrete pouch portions, each pouch portion includes a charge of a composition adapted for oral use.
  • Representative equipment for supplying the filler material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0018539 to Brinkley , which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • the apparatus may include a subdividing unit for subdividing the continuous tubular member into individual pouch portions and, once subdivided into the individual pouch portions, may also include a sealing unit for sealing at least one of the ends of each pouch portion.
  • the continuous tubular member may be sealed into individual pouch portions with a sealing unit and then, once the individual pouch portions are sealed, the continuous tubular member may be subdivided into discrete individual pouch portions by a subdividing unit subdividing the continuous tubular member between the sealed ends of serially-disposed pouch portions.
  • sealing (closing) of the individual pouch portions of the continuous tubular member may occur substantially concurrently with the subdivision thereof, using a closing and dividing unit.
  • the amount of material contained within each pouch may vary.
  • the weight of the mixture within each pouch is at least about 50 mg, for example, from about 50 mg to about 2 grams, from about 100 mg to about 1.5 grams, or from about 200 mg to about 700 mg.
  • the dry weight of the material within each pouch is about 50 mg to about 150 mg.
  • the dry weight of the material within each pouch is typically about 300 mg to about 500 mg.
  • Material BA was prepared with a solution set forth in Table 2A.
  • a dry film was made by the following process: 1) heat water; 2) add surfactant and mix for 20-30 seconds; 3) add gelling agents and HPMC(s) and mix; 4) add glycerin when solution is lump free; 5) add remaining ingredients and continue mixing until smooth; and 6) cast film composition on Mylar ® film and dry at about 100 °C.
  • the dried film had the composition set forth in Table 2B below.
  • Dry Material BA Ingredient Dry Wt % Water 4.2 Lumulse TM GMS-K (Surfactant) 2.1 AnyAddy ® AN 5 (HPMC) 30.2 AnyAddy ® CN10M (HPMC) 7.3 Agaroid ® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 2.0 Glycerin 12.0 Polyoxyl (40) Stearate (Emulsifier) 5.2 Vivapur ® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 19.0 Sodium Chloride 0.4 Instant Pure-Cote ® B792 (Starch) 2.8 Xylitol 5.7 Sucralose 0.7 Nicotine Benzoate 1.4 Sodium Benzoate 5.9 Flavor 1.0 Table 3.
  • Pouches were made using a fleece (viscose polyester blend fleece, with an acrylate binder) and fill material B 1, prepared with the composition as listed in Table 4 below. The pouch was created with about 470 mg of fill material giving a final pouch weight about 487 mg. Pouch pH was about 6.83. Table 4. Fill B1 Material % Cellulose Sphere, 500 ⁇ m 25 Material BA (Shredded) 75
  • Material BB was prepared with a solution as set forth in Table 5 below.
  • a dry film was made by the following process: 1) heat water; 2) add surfactant and mix for 20-30 seconds; 3) add gelling agents and Pullulan and mix; 4) add glycerin when solution is lump free; 5) add remaining ingredients and continue mixing until smooth; and 6) cast film composition on Mylar ® film and dry at about 100 °C.
  • the dried film had the composition set forth in Table 6 below.
  • Dry Material BB Ingredient Wt % Water 4.62 Pullulan 57.90 Agaroid ® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 3.35 Glycerin 4.24 Vivapur ® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 7.59 Sodium Chloride 0.49 Instant Pure-Cote ® B792 (Starch) 3.93 Xylitol 7.95 Sucralose 1.01 Nicotine Benzoate 1.65 Sodium Benzoate 6.09 Flavor (Vanillyl Butyl Ether) 0.05 Flavor 1.13 Table 7.
  • Pouches were made using a fleece (viscose polyester blend fleece, with an acrylate binder) and fill material B2 as set forth in Table 9 below, prepared with shredded material BB and the fill material composition BC as listed in Table 8 below.
  • the pouch was created with about 470 mg of fill material giving a final pouch weight about 500 mg.
  • Table 8 Fill Material BC Ingredient Wt % Cellulose Sphere, 1000 ⁇ m 84.04 Sodium Chloride 3.15 Xylitol 1.76 Sucralose 0.50 Sodium Benzoate 1.55 Flavor 2.00 Nicotine Benzoate (Aqueous, 25% Nicotine) 7.00 Table 9.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)

Abstract

The disclosure provides a pouched product including an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition including a plurality of particles, each particle including a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant. A method of preparing a composition is also provided, the method including mixing water with at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant to form a mixture; extruding the mixture through a die to form an extrudate or depositing the mixture onto a surface to form a sheet; drying the extrudate or sheet; shredding the extrudate or sheet to form a plurality of particles; and depositing the plurality of particles within a cavity of a water-permeable pouch.

Description

    FIELD OF THE DISCLOSURE
  • The present disclosure relates to flavored products intended for human use. The products are configured for oral use and deliver substances such as flavors and/or active ingredients during use. Such products may include tobacco or a product derived from tobacco, or may be tobacco-free alternatives.
  • BACKGROUND
  • There are many categories of products intended for oral use and enjoyment. For example, oral tobacco products containing nicotine, which is known to have both stimulant and anxiolytic properties, have been available for many years. Conventional formats for so-called "smokeless" tobacco products include moist snuff, snus, and chewing tobacco, which are typically formed almost entirely of particulate, granular, or shredded tobacco, and which are either portioned by the user or presented to the user in individual portions, such as in single-use pouches or sachets. See for example, the types of smokeless tobacco formulations, ingredients, and processing methodologies set forth in US Pat. Nos. 6,668,839 to Williams ; 6,834,654 to Williams ; 6,953,040 to Atchley et al. ; 7,032,601 to Atchley et al. ; and 7,694,686 to Atchley et al. ; 7,810,507 to Dube et al. ; 7,819,124 to Strickland et al. ; 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al. ; 7,901,512 to Quinter et al. ; 8,627,828 to Strickland et al. ; 11,246,334 to Atchley , each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In addition, traditional tobacco materials and non-tobacco materials have been combined with other ingredients to form product formats distinct from traditional smokeless products, with example formats including lozenges, pastilles, gels, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos. 2008/0196730 to Engstrom et al .; 2008/0305216 to Crawford et al .; 2009/0293889 to Kumar et al .; 2010/0291245 to Gao et al ; 2011/0139164 to Mua et al. ; 2012/0037175 to Cantrell et al .; 2012/0055494 to Hunt et al .; 2012/0138073 to Cantrell et al .; 2012/0138074 to Cantrell et al .; 2013/0074855 to Holton, Jr .; 2013/0074856 to Holton, Jr .; 2013/0152953 to Mua et al .; 2013/0274296 to Jackson et al .; 2015/0068545 to Moldoveanu et al. ; 2015/0101627 to Marshall et al .; and 2015/0230515 to Lampe et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • There is continuing interest in the development of new types of oral products that deliver advantageous sensorial or biological activity. Such products typically contain flavorants and/or active ingredients such as nicotine, caffeine, botanicals, or cannabidiol. The format of such products can vary, and include pouched products containing a powdered or granular composition, lozenges, pastilles, liquids, gels, emulsions, meltable compositions, and the like. See, for example, the types of products described in US Patent App. Pub. Nos. 2022/0160675 to Gerardi et al. ; 2022/0071984 to Poole et al .; 2021/0378948 to Gerardi et al .; 2021/0330590 to Hutchens et al. ; 2021/0186081 to Gerardi et al. ; 2021/0177754 to Keller et al ; 2021/0177043 to Gerardi et al .; 2021/0177038 to Gerardi et al .; 2021/0169867 to Holton, Jr. et al .; 2021/0169792 to Holton, Jr. et al .; 2021/0169132 to Holton, Jr. et al .; 2021/0169121 to St. Charles , and 2021/0169122 to St. Charles , each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • BRIEF SUMMARY
  • The present disclosure relates to pouched product comprising an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition comprising a plurality of particles, each particle comprising a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant. In some embodiments, the stability of flavorants and/or active ingredients that may be volatile and prone to loss from the composition are provided in a more stable form when included in the particles of the composition, which are typically formed by shredding a sheet or extrudate material. Still further, in some embodiments, use of the particles within the composition can offer different release properties with respect to an active ingredient as compared to other oral product formats.
  • The disclosure includes, without limitation, the following embodiments.
  • Embodiment 1: A pouched product comprising: an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition comprising a plurality of particles, each particle comprising a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant.
  • Embodiment 2: The pouched product of Embodiment 1, wherein the particles are in the form of a shredded sheet or extrudate material.
  • Embodiment 3: The pouched product of Embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the at least one binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates, pectin, gums, carrageenan, povidone, pullulan, zein, cellulose ethers, starches, dextrans, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 4: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the at least one binder comprises one or more cellulose ethers, such as methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 5: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the at least one filler comprises one or more cellulosic non-tobacco plant materials.
  • Embodiment 6: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 5, wherein the at least one filler comprises microcrystalline cellulose.
  • Embodiment 7: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 6, wherein the binder is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight and/or wherein the filler is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  • Embodiment 8: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 7, wherein each particle further comprises one or more surfactants.
  • Embodiment 9: The pouched product of Embodiment 8, wherein the one or more surfactants are present in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  • Embodiment 10: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 9, wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of pH adjusters, buffering agents, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, preservatives, sweeteners, salts, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 11: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 10, wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of glycerin, propylene glycol, sugar alcohols, non-nutritive sweeteners, sodium chloride, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 12: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 11, wherein each particle comprises one or more active ingredients selected from the group consisting of a nicotinic component, nutraceuticals, botanicals, stimulants, amino acids, vitamins, cannabinoids, cannabamimetics, terpenes, pharmaceutical agents, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 13: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 12, wherein each particle comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 14: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 13, wherein each particle comprises: at least one binder in an amount of about 20 to about 70 % by weight; at least one filler in an amount of about 5 to about 20 % by weight; one or more surfactants in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight; at least one flavorant or at least one active ingredient in an amount of about 0.5 to about 20 % by weight; optionally, at least one humectant in an amount of about 5 to about 15 % by weight; and optionally, at least one sweetener in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight.
  • Embodiment 15: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 14, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 µm.
  • Embodiment 16: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 15, wherein the composition is substantially free of a tobacco material.
  • Embodiment 17: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 16, wherein the composition further comprises at least one additional filler admixed with the plurality of particles.
  • Embodiment 18: The pouched product of Embodiment 17, wherein the at least one additional filler comprises cellulose spheres.
  • Embodiment 19: The pouched product of Embodiment 17 or 18, wherein the at least one additional filler comprises microcrystalline cellulose.
  • Embodiment 20: The pouched product of any one of Embodiments 1 to 19, wherein each particle comprises at least one volatile flavor component, such as a flavor component comprising one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof.
  • Embodiment 21: A method of preparing a composition adapted for oral use, comprising:
    • mixing water with at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant to form a mixture;
    • extruding the mixture through a die to form an extrudate or depositing the mixture onto a surface to form a sheet;
    • drying the extrudate or sheet;
    • shredding the extrudate or sheet to form a plurality of particles;
    • optionally admixing the plurality of particles with an additional filler material; and
    • depositing the plurality of particles within a cavity of a water-permeable pouch.
  • Embodiment 22: The method of Embodiment 21, wherein the mixture further comprises one or more surfactants.
  • Embodiment 23: The method of Embodiment 21 or 22, wherein the mixture comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  • Embodiment 24: The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 23, wherein the drying comprises drying the extrudate or sheet to a water level of about 5 to about 25% by weight.
  • Embodiment 25: The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 24, wherein the additional filler material comprises cellulose spheres.
  • Embodiment 26: The method of any one of Embodiments 21 to 25, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 µm after shredding.
  • These and other features, aspects, and advantages of the disclosure will be apparent from a reading of the following detailed description together with the accompanying drawings, which are briefly described below. The disclosure includes any combination of two, three, four, or more of the above-noted embodiments as well as combinations of any two, three, four, or more features or elements set forth in this disclosure, regardless of whether such features or elements are expressly combined in a specific embodiment description herein. This disclosure is intended to be read holistically such that any separable features or elements of the disclosure, in any of its various aspects and embodiments, should be viewed as intended to be combinable unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • Having thus described aspects of the disclosure in the foregoing general terms, reference will now be made to the accompanying drawing, which is not necessarily drawn to scale. The drawing is an example only, and should not be construed as limiting the disclosure.
  • FIG. 1 is a front perspective view illustrating a pouched product according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The present disclosure now will be described more fully hereinafter. This disclosure may, however, be embodied in many different forms and should not be construed as limited to the embodiments set forth herein; rather, these embodiments are provided so that this disclosure will be thorough and complete, and will fully convey the scope of the disclosure to those skilled in the art. As used in this specification and the claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.
  • The disclosure generally provides compositions and products configured for oral use. The term "configured for oral use" as used herein means that the product is provided in a form such that during use, saliva in the mouth of the user causes one or more of the components of the composition (e.g., flavoring agents and/or active ingredients) to pass into the mouth of the user. In some embodiments, the composition is adapted to deliver components to a user through mucous membranes in the user's mouth, the user's digestive system, or both, and, in some instances, said component is a flavorant, a nicotine component, or other active ingredient that can be absorbed through the mucous membranes in the mouth or absorbed through the digestive tract when the product is used.
  • In some embodiments, the compositions and products provided herein are pouched products, e.g., in the form of a mixture of one or more components dispersed within a moisture-permeable container (e.g., a water-permeable pouch). Pouched products generally comprise, in addition to the pouch-based exterior, a composition/mixture within the pouch that typically comprises one or more active ingredients and/or one or more flavorants, and various other optional ingredients.
  • A water-permeable pouch format is typically used by placing the pouch containing the composition in the mouth of a human subject/user. Generally, the pouch is placed somewhere in the oral cavity of the user, for example under the lips, in the same way as moist snuff products are generally used. The pouch preferably is not chewed or swallowed. Exposure to saliva causes some of the components of the mixture within the water-permeable pouch (e.g., flavoring agents and/or active agents) to pass through the water-permeable pouch and provide the user with flavor and satisfaction, and the user is not required to spit out any portion of the composition. After about 10 minutes to about 60 minutes, typically about 15 minutes to about 45 minutes, of use/enjoyment, substantial amounts of the composition have been ingested by the human subject, and the pouch may be removed from the mouth of the consumer for disposal.
  • For example, as illustrated in FIG. 1, an example pouched product 10 can comprise an outer water-permeable container 20 in the form of a pouch which contains a particulate composition 15 adapted for oral use. The orientation, size, and type of outer water-permeable pouch and the type and nature of the composition adapted for oral use that are illustrated herein are not construed as limiting thereof. Various, non-limiting components of certain particulate compositions 15 according to the present disclosure are described in further detail herein below.
  • According to the present disclosure, the composition contained within a pouched composition typically includes a plurality of particles containing a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant. The particles are typically formed by shredding a sheet or extrudate material, which is described in greater detail below. As used herein, "shredding" merely refers to resizing a material into smaller pieces/particles and is not limiting to a particular particle size or shape. Reference to an "extrudate" intends to encompass any material extruded through a die. Reference to a "sheet" intends to encompass any material deposited onto a surface such that a film-like, relatively planar material is formed.
  • Sheet or Extrudate Material
  • The sheet or extrudate material comprises one or more fillers, one or more binders, and serves as a carrier for either an active ingredient or a flavorant, or both an active ingredient and a flavorant. The sheet or extrudate material can also include one or more surfactants, as well as other types of ingredients suitable for use in oral products, such as humectants, salts, sweeteners, buffering agents, taste modifiers, preservatives, oral care ingredients, tobacco, colorants, processing aids, and the like. All of these types of components are discussed hereinbelow. The sheet or extrudate material is typically utilized in particle form suitable for use with conventional pouching equipment. Alternatively, the sheet or extrudate material can be used in an oral product without resizing to produce a plurality of particles.
  • In particular embodiments, use of the sheet or extrudate material in an oral product can have several benefits, including flavor longevity and modified active ingredient release. In addition, through control of the particle size of the sheet or extrudate material used in the product, the overall pouch fill density of the product can be better controlled to a desired level. Use of the sheet or extrudate material can also, in some embodiments, enhance the ability to process multiple additives desired in an oral product (e.g., multiple active ingredients or multiple flavorants) by incorporating such materials into a single carrier material. Additionally, active ingredient (e.g., nicotine) release or dissolution properties can be better controlled by, for example, using multiple sheet or extrudate materials of different composition and/or combining the sheet or extrudate material with other types of oral product components, such as other types of filler components carrying one or more active ingredients. Still further, the present disclosure provides potential increased flavor stability in some embodiments through use of a sheet or extrudate material as a flavor carrier having a different (typically lower) pH environment than the remaining components of the oral product. Additionally, in some embodiments, the present disclosure provides potential increased flavor longevity through incorporation of flavorants in the sheet or extrudate material. Although not bound by a theory of operation, it is believed that, in some embodiments, the presence of a film-forming binder component can bind a volatile flavorant or active ingredient, thereby increasing stability and reducing loss of such volatile components.
  • The sheet or extrudate material can be used as the sole component of the oral product, or the sheet or extrudate material can be combined with other components, such as further filler components, active ingredients, flavorants, and the like. For example, a second particulate material, such as a combination of microcrystalline cellulose with one or more active ingredients or flavorants, could be mixed with particles of the sheet or extrudate material within the pouched product. In one embodiment, a sheet or extrudate material of the present disclosure is combined with a separate filler component, such as in amounts of sheet/extrudate material of about 50 to about 90% by weight, and separate filler component of about 10 to about 50% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral product (exclusive of the pouch material). All of the weight percentages noted below for various product components can apply to both the sheet or extrudate material and the overall composition of the oral product. Any of the oral composition components noted herein could be included in the sheet or extrudate material and/or could be present in other portions of the oral composition in admixture with particles of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Binder
  • A binder (or combination of binders) is employed in the sheet or extrudate material in ar amount sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes and physical integrity. The binder materials can serve to add cohesiveness to a sheet or extrudate material, and can also serve as gelling agents. Typically, the amount of binder present is up to about 50% by weight, and some embodiments are characterized by a binder content of at least about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material. In some embodiments, the binder is present in ar amount by weight in a range from about 5 to about 50% based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material, such as from about 5%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, about 25%, or abou 30%, to about 35%, about 40%, or about 45% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Typical binders can be organic or inorganic, or a combination thereof. Representative binders include povidone, sodium alginate, pectin, gums, carrageenan, pullulan, zein, cellulose derivatives, and the like, and combinations thereof. In some implementations, combinations or blends of two or more binder materials may be employed. Other examples of binder materials are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 5,101,839 to Jakob et al. ; and U.S. Pat. No. 4,924,887 to Raker et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • In some embodiments, the binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates carrageenan and other seaweed hydrocolloids, exudate gum hydrocolloids, cellulose ethers starches, gums, dextrans, povidone, pullulan, zein, or combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the binder is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers) meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group. Non-limiting examples of such cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose ("HPC") hydroxypropylmethylcellulose ("HPMC"), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose ("CMC"). Suitable cellulose ethers include hydroxypropylcellulose, such as Klucel H from Aqualon Co.; hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, such as Methocel K4MS from DuPont hydroxyethylcellulose, such as Natrosol 250 MRCS from Aqualon Co.; methylcellulose, such as Methocel A4M, K4M, and E15 from DuPont.; and sodium carboxymethylcellulose, such as CMC 7HF, CMC 7LF, and CMC 7H4F from Aqualon Co. In some embodiments, the binder is one or more cellulose ethers (e.g., a single cellulose ether or a combination of several cellulose ethers, such as two or three, for example). In some embodiments, the binder is a cellulose ether selected from the group consisting of methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, and combinations thereof.
  • Surfactant
  • A surfactant or combination of surfactants can be included in the sheet or extrudate material in order to improve dispersion and mixing of the various components of the material. Surfactant molecules typically comprise both hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions and reduce interfacial tension. Surfactants can be ionic or nonionic.
  • Examples of surfactants that can be used include, but are not limited to, long-chain triglycerides, such as C16-C18 triglycerides, linoleic acid, glyceryl monooleate, sodium lauryl sulfate (sodium dodecyl sulfate, SLS, or SDS), docusate sodium, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester surfactants (including, e.g., mono- and tri-lauryl, palmityl, stearyl and oleyl esters), such as those known as polysorbates and commercially available under the tradename TWEEN® (e.g TWEEN®20, TWEEN®40, TWEEN®65, TWEEN®80, and TWEEN®85); polyoxyethylene fatty acid esters, e.g., polyoxyethylene stearic acid esters such as those commercially available under the trade name MYRJ (e.g., MYRJ 52); polyoxyethylene ethers, such as those available under the trade name BRIJ® (e.g., BRIJ® 23, BRIJ® 30, BRIJ ® 35, BRIJ ® 52, BRIJ ® 56, BRIJ ® 58, BRIJ ® 72, and BRIJ ® 78); polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, e.g., those commercially available as CREMOPHOR® surfactants (e.g., CREMOPHOR® EL, CREMOPHOR® ELP, and CREMOPHOR® RH40); sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as those commercially available under the tradename SPAN® (e.g., SPAN®20, SPAN®40, SPAN®60, SPAN®65, SPAN®80, and SPAN®85); PEG glyceryl fatty acid esters such as PEG-8 glyceryl caprylate/caprate (commercially known as LABRASOL®); polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene co-polymers, e.g., those commercially available as PLURONIC® or POLOXAMER®; diethyleneglycol-monoethylether (DGME), commercially known as TRANSCUTOL®; polyoxyethylene 15 hydroxy stearate (Macrogol 15 hydroxy stearate, Solutol HS15®); polyoxyethylene nonylphenol ether (NONOXYNOL®); PEG-4 glyceryl caprylate/caprate (Labrafac Hydro WL 1219); PEG-32 glyceryl laurate (Gelucire 44/14); PEG-6 glyceryl mono oleate (Labrafil® M 1944 CS); PEG-6 glyceryl linoleate (Labrafil® M 2125 CS); monoglycerides and acetylated monoglycerides, e.g., glycerol monodicocoate (IMWITOR® 928) and glycerol monocaprylate (IMWITOR® 308); mono- and di acetylated monoglycerides; α-tocopherol; α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (vitamin E TPGS); α-tocopherol palmitate and α-tocopherol acetate; propylene glycol mono- and di-fatty acid esters, such as propylene glycol laurate; propylene glycol caprylate/caprate; glycerol triacetate; sugar esters, lecithins, and combinations of any two or more thereof. In some embodiments, combination of two or more surfactants is included in the sheet or extrudate material.
  • The amount of surfactant in the disclosed sheet or extrudate materials can vary. In some embodiments, the amount of surfactant is about 1% or greater by weight, about 2% or greater by weight, about 3% or greater by weight, about 4% or greater by weight, about 5% or greater by weight. In some embodiments, the amount of surfactant is no more than about 20% by weight, no more than about 15% by weight, no more than about 10% by weight, or no more than about 8% by weight. Certain, non-limiting ranges include, e.g., about 1% by weight to about 20% by weight about 5% to about 15% by weight, or about 5% to about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Filler Component
  • According to the present disclosure, sheet or extrudate materials provided herein typically comprise one or more filler components. Such particulate filler components may fulfill multiple functions, such as enhancing certain organoleptic properties such as texture and mouthfeel, enhancing cohesiveness or compressibility of the product, and the like.
  • Generally, filler components are porous, particulate materials and are cellulose-based. For example, suitable particulate filler components are any non-tobacco plant material or derivative thereof, including cellulose materials derived from such sources. Examples of cellulosic non-tobacco plant material include cereal grains (e.g., maize, oat, barley, rye, buckwheat, and the like), sugar beet (e.g., FIBREX® brand filler available from International Fiber Corporation), bran fiber, citrus fiber (e.g., CITRI-FI® brand fiber available from Fiberstar), and mixtures thereof. Non-limiting examples of derivatives of non-tobacco plant material include starches (e.g., from potato, wheat, rice, corn), natural cellulose, and modified cellulosic materials. Additional examples of potential particulate filler components include maltodextrin, dextrose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, lactose, mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol. Combinations of fillers can also be used.
  • "Starch" as used herein may refer to pure starch from any source, modified starch, or starch derivatives. Starch is present, typically in granular form, in almost all green plants and in various types of plant tissues and organs (e.g., seeds, leaves, rhizomes, roots, tubers, shoots, fruits, grains, and stems). Starch can vary in composition, as well as in granular shape and size. Often, starch from different sources has different chemical and physical characteristics. A specific starch can be selected for inclusion in the mixture based on the ability of the starch material to impart a specific organoleptic property to composition. Starches derived from various sources can be used. For example, major sources of starch include cereal grains (e.g., rice, wheat, and maize) and root vegetables (e.g., potatoes and cassava). Other examples of sources of starch include acorns, arrowroot, arracacha, bananas, barley, beans (e.g., favas, lentils, mung beans, peas, chickpeas), breadfruit, buckwheat, canna, chestnuts, colacasia, katakuri, kudzu, malanga, millet, oats, oca, Polynesian arrowroot, sago, sorghum, sweet potato, quinoa, rye, tapioca, taro, tobacco, water chestnuts, and yams. Certain starches are modified starches. A modified starch has undergone one or more structural modifications, often designed to alter its high heat properties. Some starches have been developed by genetic modifications, and are considered to be "genetically modified" starches. Other starches are obtained and subsequently physically (e.g., heat, cool water swelling, etc.), chemically, or enzymatically modified. For example, modified starches can be starches that have been subjected to chemical reactions, such as esterification, etherification, oxidation, depolymerization (thinning) by acid catalysis or oxidation in the presence of base, bleaching, transglycosylation and depolymerization (e.g., dextrinization in the presence of a catalyst), cross-linking, acetylation, hydroxypropylation, and/or partial hydrolysis. Enzymatic treatment includes subjecting native starches to enzyme isolates or concentrates, microbial enzymes, and/or enzymes native to plant materials, e.g., amylase present in corn kernels to modify corn starch. Other starches are modified by heat treatments, such as pregelatinization, dextrinization, and/or cold water swelling processes. Certain modified starches include monostarch phosphate, distarch glycerol, distarch phosphate esterified with sodium trimetaphosphate, phosphate distarch phosphate, acetylated distarch phosphate, starch acetate esterified with acetic anhydride, starch acetate esterified with vinyl acetate, acetylated distarch adipate, acetylated distarch glycerol, hydroxypropyl starch, hydroxypropyl distarch glycerol, starch sodium octenyl succinate.
  • In some embodiments, the filler comprises or is an inorganic material. Examples of potential inorganic fillers include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, and bioceramic materials (e.g., porous hydroxyapatite).
  • In some embodiments, the particulate filler component is a cellulose material or cellulose derivative and can, in some embodiments, comprise microcrystalline cellulose ("MCC"). The MCC may be synthetic or semi-synthetic, or it may be obtained entirely from natural celluloses. The MCC may be selected from the group consisting of AVICEL® grades PH-100, PH-102, PH-103, PH-105, PH-112, PH-113, PH-200, PH-300, PH-302, VIVACEL® grades 101, 102, 12, 20 and EMOCEL® grades 50M and 90M, and the like, and mixtures thereof.
  • In some embodiments, a particulate filler can be characterized as substantially spherical, such as cellulose spheres. By "substantially spherical" is meant at least a portion of the particulate filler component is in the shape of a sphere and/or is "sphere-like' in shape. As such, "substantially spherical" encompasses slightly elongated (e.g., oval) shapes, slightly flattened shapes, and the like. Substantially spherical particulate filler components are intended to be distinguished from conventional particulate filler components (e.g., commercially available "fillers" or "particulate fillers" that are not explicitly designed as "spherical"). Such conventional particulate filler components typically substantially comprise particles with rather irregular shapes. In some cases, at least some (e.g., including a majority) of such conventional particulate filler components comprise one or more edges (e.g., jagged edges) that are typically not observable on substantially spherical particulate filler components as employed in the context of the present disclosure. Further, the uniformity of the particle shapes and sizes of a substantially spherical filler component is generally much greater than that of a conventional particulate filler component.
  • In some embodiments, the substantially spherical filler component comprises MCC. In some embodiments, the substantially spherical filler component comprises solid (although porous) MCC spheres. In some embodiments, the substantially spherical filler component comprises hollow MCC spheres. In some embodiments, the center/core of such hollow MCC spheres may be unfilled; in some embodiments, the center/core of such hollow MCC spheres may be filled with one or more additional components (e.g., flavorants, fillers, active ingredients, etc.). Examples of suitable MCC spheres include, but are not limited to, Vivapur® MCC spheres from JRS Pharma, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 100-200 µm (Vivapur® 100), 200-355 µm (Vivapur® 200), 355-500 µm (Vivapur® 350), 500-710 µm (Vivapur® 500), 710-1000 µm (Vivapur®700), and 1000-1400 µm (Vivapur® 1000). Further examples of suitable MCC spheres include, but are not limited to, Celphere MCC spheres from Asahi Kasei Corporation, available, e.g., with particle sizes of 75-212 µm (Celphere SCP-100), 106-212 µm (Celphere CP-102), 150-300 µm (Celphere CP-203), 300-500 µm (Celphere CP-305), and 500-710 µm (Celphere CP-507).
  • The average diameter of the substantially spherical particulate filler particles provided herein can vary, and is not particularly limited. For example, in some embodiments, the spherical filler particles have an average diameter of about 100 microns to about 1000 microns, such as about 250 microns to about 750 microns. For example, in some embodiments, the average diameter is about 100 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 100 microns to about 400 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 200 microns, about 200 microns to about 500 microns, about 200 microns to about 400 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, about 300 microns to about 500 microns, about 300 microns to about 400 microns, or about 400 microns to about 500 microns. In some embodiments, the average diameter is about 500 microns to about 1000 microns, e.g., about 500 microns to about 900 microns, about 500 microns to about 800 microns, about 500 microns to about 700 microns, about 500 microns to about 600 microns, about 600 microns to about 1000 microns, about 600 microns to about 900 microns, about 600 microns to about 800 microns, about 600 microns to about 700 microns, about 700 microns to about 1000 microns, about 700 microns to about 900 microns, about 700 microns to about 800 microns, about 800 microns to about 1000 microns, about 800 microns to about 900 microns, or about 900 microns to about 1000 microns.
  • The distribution of diameters around this average diameter (i.e., the particle size distribution) can also vary; in some embodiments, the distribution of diameters is close to the listed value (e.g., +/- about 25% of the stated value, +/- about 20% of the stated value, +/- about 15% of the stated value, +/- about 10% of the stated value, +/- about 5% of the stated value, or +/- about 1% of the stated value. The disclosure is not, however, limited to materials with such narrow distributions; in some embodiments, the diameter of the MCC spheres within a given material can vary within a wider range.
  • The amount of filler can vary, but is typically up to about 50 percent of the sheet or extrudate by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate. A typical range of filler (e.g., MCC) within the composition can be from about 5 to about 50% by total weight of the composition, for example, from about 5, about 10, about 15, or about 20 to about 30, about 35, about 40, or about 45 weight percent (e.g., about 5 to about 40 weight percent or about 10 to about 25 weight percent).
  • In one embodiment, the filler further comprises a cellulose derivative or a combination of such derivatives. In some embodiments, the mixture comprises from about 1% to about 10% of the cellulose derivative by weight, based on the total weight of the composition, with some embodiments comprising about 1 to about 5% by weight of cellulose derivative. In some embodiments, the cellulose derivative is a cellulose ether (including carboxyalkyl ethers), meaning a cellulose polymer with the hydrogen of one or more hydroxyl groups in the cellulose structure replaced with an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or aryl group. Non-limiting examples of such cellulose derivatives include methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose ("HPC"), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose ("HPMC"), hydroxyethyl cellulose, and carboxymethylcellulose ("CMC"). In one embodiment, the cellulose derivative is one or more of methylcellulose, HPC, HPMC, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and CMC. In one embodiment, the cellulose derivative is HPC. In some embodiments, the sheet or extrudate comprises from about 0% to about 5% HPC by weight, e.g., about 1% to about 3% HPC by weight, based on the total weight of the sheet or extrudate material by weight.
  • Water/Moisture Content
  • The water content and oven volatiles of the sheet or extrudate or overall composition within the pouched product described herein, prior to use by a consumer of the product, may vary according to the desired properties. Typically, the mixture, as present within the product prior to insertion into the mouth of the user, is less than about 60 percent by weight of water, and generally is from about 1 to about 60% by weight of water, for example, from about 5 to about 55, about 10 to about 50, about 20 to about 45, or about 25 to about 40 percent water by weight, including water amounts of at least about 5% by weight, at least about 10% by weight, at least about 15% by weight, and at least about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the water content of the oral composition is relatively low, e.g., about 1% to about 12% by weight, such as less than about 10%, less than about 8%, less than about 7%, less than about 6%, less than about 5%, or less than about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the oral composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Flavoring Agent
  • In some embodiments, the oral composition comprises one or more flavoring agents. As used herein, a "flavoring agent" or "flavorant" is any flavorful or aromatic substance capable of altering the sensory characteristics associated with the oral product. Examples of sensory characteristics that can be modified by the flavoring agent include taste, mouthfeel, moistness, coolness/heat, and/or fragrance/aroma. Flavoring agents may be natural or synthetic, and the character of the flavors imparted thereby may be described, without limitation, as fresh, sweet, herbal, confectionary, floral, fruity, or spicy.
  • Specific types of flavors include, but are not limited to, vanilla, coffee, chocolate/cocoa, cream, mint, spearmint, menthol, peppermint, wintergreen, eucalyptus, lavender, cardamon, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, cascarilla, sandalwood, honey, jasmine, ginger, anise, sage, licorice, lemon, orange, apple, peach, lime, cherry, strawberry, melatonin, terpenes, and any combinations thereof. See also, Leffingwell et al., Tobacco Flavoring for Smoking Products, R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company (1972), which is incorporated herein by reference. Flavorings also may include components that are considered moistening, cooling or smoothening agents, such as eucalyptus or menthol. These flavors may be provided neat (i.e., alone) or in a composite, and may be employed as concentrates or flavor packages (e.g., spearmint and menthol, orange and cinnamon; lime, pineapple, and the like). Representative types of components also are set forth in US Pat. No. 5,387,416 to White et al. ; US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2005/0244521 to Strickland et al. ; and PCT Application Pub. No. WO 05/041699 to Quinter et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference. In some instances, the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form.
  • The flavoring agent generally comprises at least one volatile flavor component. As used herein, "volatile" refers to a chemical substance that forms a vapor readily at ambient temperatures (i.e., a chemical substance that has a high vapor pressure at a given temperature relative to a nonvolatile substance). Typically, a volatile flavor component has a molecular weight below about 400 Da, and often include at least one carbon-carbon double bond, carbon-oxygen double bond, or both. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more alcohols, aldehydes, aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, terpenes, terpenoids, or a combination thereof. Non-limiting examples of aldehydes include vanillin, ethyl vanillin, p-anisaldehyde, hexanal, furfural, isovaleraldehyde, cuminaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and citronellal. Non-limiting examples of ketones include 1-hydroxy-2-propanone and 2-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-cyclopentenone-1-one. Non-limiting examples of esters include allyl hexanoate, ethyl heptanoate, ethyl hexanoate, isoamyl acetate, and 3-methylbutyl acetate. Non-limiting examples of terpenes include sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, nerolidol, thujone, myrcene, geraniol, nerol, citronellol, linalool, and eucalyptol. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises one or more of ethyl vanillin, cinnamaldehyde, sabinene, limonene, gamma-terpinene, beta-farnesene, or citral. In one embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises ethyl vanillin. In another embodiment, the at least one volatile flavor component comprises menthol.
  • In some instances, the flavoring agent may be provided in a spray-dried form or a liquid form. In some embodiments, a liquid flavorant is disposed (i.e., adsorbed or absorbed in or on) a porous particulate carrier, for example microcrystalline cellulose, which is then combined with the other composition ingredients. Embodiments with flavorant present in dry form (e.g., in or on microcrystalline cellulose) may be advantageous in providing a more homogenous product.
  • The amount of flavoring agent, where present in the oral composition can vary, but is typically up to about 10 weight percent, and some embodiments are characterized by a flavoring agent content of at least about 0.1 weight percent, such as about 0.1 to about 1 weight percent, 0.5 to about 10 weight percent, about 1 to about 6 weight percent, or about 2 to about 5 weight percent, based on the total weight of the oral composition. The amount of flavoring agent present within the composition may vary over a period of time (e.g., during a period of storage after preparation of the composition). For example, certain volatile components present in the mixture may evaporate or undergo chemical transformations, leading to a reduction in the concentration of one or more volatile flavor components. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Taste Modifiers
  • In order to improve the organoleptic properties of a composition as disclosed herein, the composition may include one or more taste modifying agents ("taste modifiers") which may serve to mask, alter, block, or improve the flavor of a composition as described herein. Non-limiting examples of such taste modifiers include trigeminal sensates, analgesic or anesthetic herbs, spices, and flavors which produce a perceived cooling (e.g., menthol, eucalyptus, mint), warming (e.g., cinnamon), or painful (e.g., capsaicin) sensation. Certain taste modifiers fall into more than one overlapping category.
  • In some embodiments, the taste modifier is a cooling agent, such as WS-3 (N-ethyl-5-methyl-2-(1-methylethyl)-cyclohexane carboxamide), WS-23 (N,2,3-trimethyl-2-propan-2-ylbutanamide), WS-5 (N-[(ethoxycarbonyl)methyl)-p-menthane-3-carboxamide), EVERCOOL 180 ((1R,2S,SR)-N-(4-(cyanomethyl)phenyl)menthylcarboxamide ), EVERCOOL 190 ((1R,2S,SR)-N-(2-(pyridin-2-yl)ethyl)menthylcarboxamide), or combinations thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the taste modifier modifies one or more of bitter, sweet, salty, or sour tastes. In some embodiments, the taste modifier targets pain receptors. In some embodiments, the composition comprises an active ingredient having a bitter taste, and a taste modifier which masks or blocks the perception of the bitter taste. In some embodiments, the taste modifier is a substance which targets pain receptors (e.g., vanilloid receptors) in the user's mouth to mask e.g., a bitter taste of another component (e.g., an active ingredient). In some embodiments, the taste modifier is capsaicin.
  • In some embodiments, the taste modifier is the amino acid gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA), referenced herein above with respect to amino acids. Studies in mice suggest that GABA may serve function(s) in taste buds in addition to synaptic inhibition. See, e.g., Dvoryanchikov et al., J Neurosci. 2011 Apr 13;31(15):5782-91. Without wishing to be bound by theory, GABA may suppress the perception of certain tastes, such as bitterness. In some embodiments, the composition comprises caffeine and GABA.
  • In some embodiments, the taste modifier is adenosine monophosphate (AMP). AMP is a naturally occurring nucleotide substance which can block bitter food flavors or enhance sweetness. It does not directly alter the bitter flavor, but may alter human perception of "bitter" by blocking the associated receptor.
  • In some embodiments, the taste modifier is lactisole. Lactisole is an antagonist of sweet taste receptors. Temporarily blocking sweetness receptors may accentuate e.g., savory notes.
  • When present, a representative amount of taste modifier is about 0.01% by weight or more, about 0.1% by weight or more, or about 1.0% by weight or more, but will typically make up less than about 10% by weight of the total weight of the composition, (e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 5%, or about 10% by weight of the total weight of the composition). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Salt
  • In some embodiments, the oral composition may further comprise a salt (e.g., alkali metal salts), typically employed in an amount sufficient to provide desired sensory attributes to the mixture. Non-limiting examples of suitable salts include sodium chloride, potassium chloride, ammonium chloride, flour salt, and the like. When present, a representative amount of salt is about 0.25 percent by weight or more, about 1.0 percent by weight or more, or at about 1.5 percent by weight or more, but will typically make up about 10 percent or less of the total weight of the composition, or about 7.5 percent or less or about 5 percent or less (e.g., about 0.5 to about 5 percent by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Sweetener
  • The composition typically further comprises one or more sweeteners. The sweeteners can be any sweetener or combination of sweeteners, in natural or artificial form, or as a combination of natural and artificial sweeteners. Examples of natural sweeteners include isomaltulose, fructose, sucrose, glucose, maltose, mannose, galactose, lactose, stevia, honey, and the like. Examples of artificial sweeteners include sucralose, maltodextrin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame K, neotame and the like. In some embodiments, the sweetener comprises one or more sugar alcohols. Sugar alcohols are polyols derived from monosaccharides or disaccharides that have a partially or fully hydrogenated form. Sugar alcohols have, for example, about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms and include erythritol, arabitol, ribitol, isomalt, maltitol, dulcitol, iditol, mannitol, xylitol, lactitol, sorbitol, and combinations thereof (e.g., hydrogenated starch hydrolysates). In some embodiments, the mixture provided herein can include a sugar alcohol (e.g., xylitol or erythritol) in combination with a lesser amount of artificial or non-nutritive sweetener (e.g., sucralose, aspartame, acesulfame K, or any combination thereof). When present, a representative amount of sweetener may make up from about 0.1 to about 20 percent or more of the of the composition by weight, for example, from about 0.1 to about 1%, from about 1 to about 5%, from about 5 to about 10%, or from about 10 to about 20% of the composition on a weight basis, based on the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Humectant
  • In some embodiments, one or more humectants may be employed in the composition. Examples of humectants include, but are not limited to, polyols such as glycerin, propylene glycol, and the like. Where included, the humectant is typically provided in an amount sufficient to provide desired moisture attributes to the composition. When present, a humectant will typically make up about 20% or less of the weight of the composition or 15% or less of the weight of the composition (e.g., from about 1% to about 20% by weight or about 5% to about 15% by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Processing Aid
  • If necessary for downstream processing of the composition, such as pouching, a flow aid can also be added to the composition in order to enhance flowability of the composition. Exemplary flow aids include microcrystalline cellulose, silica, polyethylene glycol, stearic acid, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, zinc stearate, sodium stearyl fumarate, canauba wax, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the flow aid is sodium stearyl fumarate. When present, a representative amount of flow aid may make up at least about 0.5 percent or at least about 1 percent, of the total dry weight of the composition. Preferably, the amount of flow aid within the composition will not exceed about 5 percent, and frequently will not exceed about 3 percent, of the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Buffering Agent
  • In some embodiments, the composition of the present disclosure can comprise pH adjusters or buffering agents. Examples of pH adjusters and buffering agents that can be used include, but are not limited to, metal hydroxides (e.g., alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide), and other alkali metal buffers such as metal carbonates (e.g., potassium carbonate or sodium carbonate), or metal bicarbonates such as sodium bicarbonate, and the like. Non-limiting examples of suitable buffers include alkali metal acetates, glycinates, phosphates, glycerophosphates, citrates, carbonates, hydrogen carbonates, borates, or mixtures thereof. Where present, the buffering agent or pH adjuster is typically present in an amount less than about 5 percent based on the weight of the composition, for example, from about 0.1% to about 1%, about 0.1% to about 0.5%, or 0.5% to about 5%, such as, e.g., from about 0.75% to about 4%, from about 0.75% to about 3%, or from about 1% to about 2% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • In some embodiments, at least one pH adjuster is added to the sheet or extrudate material to further enhance stability of a volatile flavorant or active ingredient contained therein. For example, sufficient pH adjuster could be added to the sheet or extrudate material to maintain a pH level below 7, such as about 4 to about 7.
  • Oral Care Ingredient
  • Oral care ingredients provide the ability to inhibit tooth decay or loss, inhibit gum disease, relieve mouth pain, whiten teeth, or otherwise inhibit tooth staining, elicit salivary stimulation, inhibit breath malodor, freshen breath, or the like. For example, effective amounts of ingredients such as thyme oil, eucalyptus oil and zinc (e.g., such as the ingredients of formulations commercially available as ZYTEX® from Discus Dental) can be incorporated into the composition. Other examples of ingredients that can be incorporated in desired effective amounts within the present composition can include those that are incorporated within the types of oral care compositions set forth in Takahashi et al., Oral Microbiology and Immunology, 19(1), 61-64 (2004); U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,527 to Thistle ; and US Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos. 2006/0210488 to Jakubowski and 2006/02228308 to Cummins et al. Other exemplary ingredients of tobacco containing-formulation include those contained in formulations marketed as MALTISORB® by Roquette and DENTIZYME® by NatraRx. When present, a representative amount of oral care additive is at least about 1%, often at least about 3%, and frequently at least about 5% of the total dry weight of the composition. The amount of oral care additive within the composition will not typically exceed about 30%, often will not exceed about 25%, and frequently will not exceed about 20%, of the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Colorant
  • A colorant may optionally be employed in amounts sufficient to provide the desired physical attributes to the composition. Examples of colorants include various dyes and pigments, such as caramel coloring and titanium dioxide. The amount of colorant utilized in the composition can vary, but when present is typically up to about 3 weight percent, such as from about 0.1%, about 0.5%, or about 1%, to about 3% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Active Ingredient
  • Generally, the composition comprises one or more active ingredients. As used herein, an "active ingredient" refers to one or more substances belonging to any of the following categories: API (active pharmaceutical ingredient), food additives, natural medicaments, and naturally occurring substances that can have an effect on humans. Example active ingredients include any ingredient known to impact one or more biological functions within the body, such as ingredients that furnish pharmacological activity or other direct effect in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease, or which affect the structure or any function of the body of humans (e.g., provide a stimulating action on the central nervous system, have an energizing effect, an antipyretic or analgesic action, or an otherwise useful effect on the body). In some embodiments, the active ingredient may be of the type generally referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, "phytochemicals" or "functional foods." These types of additives are sometimes defined in the art as encompassing substances typically available from naturally-occurring sources (e.g., botanical materials) that provide one or more advantageous biological effects (e.g., health promotion, disease prevention, or other medicinal properties), but are not classified or regulated as drugs.
  • Non-limiting examples of active ingredients include those falling in the categories of botanical ingredients, stimulants, amino acids, nicotine components, and/or pharmaceutical, nutraceutical, and medicinal ingredients (e.g., vitamins, such as A, B3, B6, B12, and C, and/or cannabinoids, such as tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and cannabidiol (CBD)). Each of these categories is further described herein below. The particular choice of active ingredients will vary depending upon the desired flavor, texture, and desired characteristics of the particular product.
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient is selected from the group consisting of caffeine, taurine, GABA, theanine, vitamin C, lemon balm extract, ginseng, citicoline, sunflower lecithin, and combinations thereof. For example, the active ingredient can include a combination of caffeine, theanine, and optionally ginseng. In another embodiment, the active ingredient includes a combination of theanine, gamma-amino butyric acid (GABA), and lemon balm extract. In a further embodiment, the active ingredient includes theanine, theanine and tryptophan, or theanine and one or more B vitamins (e.g., vitamin B6 or B12). In a still further embodiment, the active ingredient includes a combination of caffeine, taurine, and vitamin C.
  • The particular percentages of active ingredients present will vary depending upon the desired characteristics of the particular product. Typically, an active ingredient or combination thereof is present in a total concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 20%. In some embodiments, the active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.5% w/w to about 10%, from about 1% to about 10%, from about 1% to about 5% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the active ingredient or combination of active ingredients is present in a concentration of from about 0.001%, about 0.01%, about 0.1% , or about 1%, up to about 20% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.002%, about 0.003%, about 0.004%, about 0.005%, about 0.006%, about 0.007%, about 0.008%, about 0.009%, about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, about 15%, about 16%, about 17%, about 18%, about 19%, or about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. Further suitable ranges for specific active ingredients are provided herein below. These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Botanical
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a botanical ingredient. As used herein, the term "botanical ingredient" or "botanical" refers to any plant material or fungal-derived material, including plant material in its natural form and plant material derived from natural plant materials, such as extracts or isolates from plant materials or treated plant materials (e.g., plant materials subjected to heat treatment, fermentation, bleaching, or other treatment processes capable of altering the physical and/or chemical nature of the material). For the purposes of the present disclosure, a "botanical" includes, but is not limited to, "herbal materials," which refer to seed-producing plants that do not develop persistent woody tissue and are often valued for their medicinal or sensory characteristics (e.g., teas or tisanes). Reference to botanical material as "non-tobacco" is intended to exclude tobacco materials (i.e., does not include any Nicotiana species). In some embodiments, the compositions as disclosed herein can be characterized as free of any tobacco material (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any tobacco material). By "substantially free" is meant that no tobacco material has been intentionally added. For example, some embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of tobacco, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of tobacco.
  • When present, a botanical is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • The botanical materials useful in the present disclosure may comprise, without limitation, any of the compounds and sources set forth herein, including mixtures thereof. Certain botanical materials of this type are sometimes referred to as dietary supplements, nutraceuticals, "phytochemicals" or "functional foods." Certain botanicals, as the plant material or an extract thereof, have found use in traditional herbal medicine, and are described further herein. Non-limiting examples of botanicals or botanical-derived materials include acai berry (Euterpe oleracea martius), acerola (Malpighia glabra), alfalfa, allspice, Angelica root, anise (e.g., star anise), annatto seed, apple (Malus domestica), apricot oil, ashwagandha, Bacopa monniera, baobab, basil (Ocimum basilicum), bay, bee balm, beet root, bergamot, blackberry (Morus nigra), black cohosh, black pepper, black tea, blueberries, boldo (Peumus boldus), borage, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, camu (Myrcaria dubia), cannabis/hemp, caraway seed, cardamom, cassis, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, Centella asiatica, chaga mushroom, Chai-hu, chamomile, cherry, chervil, chive, chlorophyll, chocolate, cilantro, cinnamon (Cinnamomum cassia), citron grass (Cymbopogon citratus), citrus, clary sage, cloves, coconut (Cocos nucifera), coffee, comfrey leaf and root, cordyceps, coriander seed, cranberry, cumin, curcumin, damiana, dandelion, Dorstenia arifolia, Dorstenia odorata, Echinacea, elderberry, elderflower, endro (Anethum graveolens), evening primrose, eucalyptus, fennel, feverfew, flax, Galphimia glauca, garlic, ginger (Zingiber officinale), gingko biloba, ginseng, goji berries, goldenseal, grape seed, grapefruit, grapefruit rosé (Citrus paradisi), graviola (Annona muricata), green tea, guarana, gutu kola, hawthorn, hazel, hemp, hibiscus flower (Hibiscus sabdariffa), honeybush, hops, jiaogulan, jambu (Spilanthes oleraceae), jasmine (Jasminum officinale), juniper berry (Juniperus communis), Kaempferia parviflora (Thai ginseng), kava, laurel, lavender, lemon (Citrus limon), lemon balm, lemongrass, licorice, lilac, Lion's mane, lutein, maca (Lepidium meyenii), mace, marjoram, matcha, milk thistle, mints (menthe), mulberry, Nardostachys chinensis, nutmeg, olive, oolong tea, orange (Citrus sinensis), oregano, papaya, paprika, pennyroyal, peppermint (Mentha piperita), pimento, potato peel, primrose, quercetin, quince, red clover, resveratrol, Rhizoma gastrodiae, Rhodiola, rooibos (red or green), rosehip (Rosa canina), rosemary, saffron, sage, Saint John's Wort, sandalwood, salvia (Salvia officinalis), savory, saw palmetto, Sceletium tortuosum, Schisandra, silybum marianum, Skullcap, spearmint, Spikenard, spirulina, slippery elm bark, sorghum bran hi-tannin, sorghum grain hi-tannin, spearmint (Mentha spicata), spirulina, star anise, sumac bran, tarragon, thyme, tisanes, turmeric, Turnera aphrodisiaca, uva ursi, valerian, vanilla, Viola odorata, white mulberry, wild yam root, wintergreen, withania somnifera, yacon root, yellow dock, yerba mate, and yerba santa
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises lemon balm. Lemon balm (Melissa officinalis) is a mildly lemon-scented herb from the same family as mint (Lamiaceae). The herb is native to Europe, North Africa, and West Asia. The tea of lemon balm, as well as the essential oil and the extract, are used in traditional and alternative medicine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises lemon balm extract. In some embodiments, the lemon balm extract is present in an amount of from about 1 to about 4% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises ginseng. Ginseng is the root of plants of the genus Panax, which are characterized by the presence of unique steroid saponin phytochemicals (ginsenosides) and gintonin. Ginseng finds use as a dietary supplement in energy drinks or herbal teas, and in traditional medicine. Cultivated species include Korean ginseng (P. ginseng), South China ginseng (P. notoginseng), and American ginseng (P. quinquefolius). American ginseng and Korean ginseng vary in the type and quantity of various ginsenosides present. In some embodiments, the ginseng is American ginseng or Korean ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises Korean ginseng. In some embodiments, ginseng is present in an amount of from about 0.4 to about 0.6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • Stimulant
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more stimulants. As used herein, the term "stimulant" refers to a material that increases activity of the central nervous system and/or the body, for example, enhancing focus, cognition, vigor, mood, alertness, and the like. Non-limiting examples of stimulants include caffeine, theacrine, theobromine, and theophylline. Theacrine (1,3,7,9-tetramethyluric acid) is a purine alkaloid which is structurally related to caffeine, and possesses stimulant, analgesic, and anti-inflammatory effects. Present stimulants may be natural, naturally derived, or wholly synthetic. For example, certain botanical materials (guarana, tea, coffee, cocoa, and the like) may possess a stimulant effect by virtue of the presence of e.g., caffeine or related alkaloids, and accordingly are "natural" stimulants. By "naturally derived" is meant the stimulant (e.g., caffeine, theacrine) is in a purified form, outside its natural (e.g., botanical) matrix. For example, caffeine can be obtained by extraction and purification from botanical sources (e.g., tea). By "wholly synthetic", it is meant that the stimulant has been obtained by chemical synthesis. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises caffeine. In some embodiments, the caffeine is present in an encapsulated form. On example of an encapsulated caffeine is Vitashure®, available from Balchem Corp., 52 Sunrise Park Road, New Hampton, NY, 10958.
  • When present, a stimulant or combination of stimulants (e.g., caffeine, theacrine, and combinations thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the composition comprises caffeine in an amount of from about 1.5 to about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • Amino acid
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises an amino acid. As used herein, the term "amino acid" refers to an organic compound that contains amine (-NH2) and carboxyl (-COOH) or sulfonic acid (SO3H) functional groups, along with a side chain (R group), which is specific to each amino acid. Amino acids may be proteinogenic or non-proteinogenic. By "proteinogenic" is meant that the amino acid is one of the twenty naturally occurring amino acids found in proteins. The proteinogenic amino acids include alanine, arginine, asparagine, aspartic acid, cysteine, glutamine, glutamic acid, glycine, histidine, isoleucine, leucine, lysine, methionine, phenylalanine, proline, serine, threonine, tryptophan, tyrosine, and valine. By "non-proteinogenic" is meant that either the amino acid is not found naturally in protein, or is not directly produced by cellular machinery (e.g., is the product of post-translational modification). Non-limiting examples of non-proteinogenic amino acids include gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA), taurine (2-aminoethanesulfonic acid), theanine (L-γ-glutamylethylamide), hydroxyproline, and beta-alanine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises theanine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises GABA. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a combination of theanine and GABA. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of theanine, GABA, and lemon balm. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine, theanine, and ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises taurine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of caffeine and taurine.
  • When present, an amino acid or combination of amino acids (e.g., theanine, GABA, and combinations thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.1% w/w to about 15% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 11%, about 12%, about 13%, about 14%, or about 15% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • Vitamins and Minerals
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a vitamin or combination of vitamins. As used herein, the term "vitamin" refers to an organic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of metabolism in a mammal. There are thirteen vitamins required by human metabolism, which are: vitamin A (as all-trans-retinol, all-trans-retinyl-esters, as well as all-trans-beta-carotene and other provitamin A carotenoids), vitamin B1 (thiamine), vitamin B2 (riboflavin), vitamin B3 (niacin), vitamin B5 (pantothenic acid), vitamin B6 (pyridoxine), vitamin B7 (biotin), vitamin B9 (folic acid or folate), vitamin B12 (cobalamins), vitamin C (ascorbic acid), vitamin D (calciferols), vitamin E (tocopherols and tocotrienols), and vitamin K (quinones). In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises vitamin C. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of vitamin C, caffeine, and taurine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more of vitamin B6 and B12. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises theanine and one or more of vitamin B6 and B12.
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises vitamin A. In some embodiments, the vitamin A is encapsulated. In some embodiments, the vitamin is vitamin B6, vitamin B12, vitamin E, vitamin C, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises a mineral. As used herein, the term "mineral" refers to an inorganic molecule (or related set of molecules) that is an essential micronutrient needed for the proper functioning of various systems in a mammal. Non-limiting examples of minerals include iron, zinc, copper, selenium, chromium, cobalt, manganese, calcium, phosphorus, sulfur, magnesium, and the like. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises iron. Suitable sources of iron include, but are not limited to, ferrous salts such as ferrous sulfate and ferrous gluconate. In some embodiments, the iron is encapsulated.
  • When present, a vitamin or mineral (or combinations thereof such as vitamin B6, vitamin B12, vitamin E, vitamin C, or a combination thereof) is typically at a concentration of from about 0.01% w/w to about 6% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, or about 0.1% w/w, to about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5% , or about 6% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • Antioxidant
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more antioxidants. As used herein, the term "antioxidant" refers to a substance which prevents or suppresses oxidation by terminating free radical reactions, and may delay or prevent some types of cellular damage. Antioxidants may be naturally occurring or synthetic. Naturally occurring antioxidants include those found in foods and botanical materials. Non-limiting examples of antioxidants include certain botanical materials, vitamins, polyphenols, and phenol derivatives.
  • Examples of botanical materials which are associated with antioxidant characteristics include without limitation acai berry, alfalfa, allspice, annatto seed, apricot oil, basil, bee balm, wild bergamot, black pepper, blueberries, borage seed oil, bugleweed, cacao, calamus root, catnip, catuaba, cayenne pepper, chaga mushroom, chervil, cinnamon, dark chocolate, potato peel, grape seed, ginseng, gingko biloba, Saint John's Wort, saw palmetto, green tea, black tea, black cohosh, cayenne, chamomile, cloves, cocoa powder, cranberry, dandelion, grapefruit, honeybush, echinacea, garlic, evening primrose, feverfew, ginger, goldenseal, hawthorn, hibiscus flower, jiaogulan, kava, lavender, licorice, marjoram, milk thistle, mints (menthe), oolong tea, beet root, orange, oregano, papaya, pennyroyal, peppermint, red clover, rooibos (red or green), rosehip, rosemary, sage, clary sage, savory, spearmint, spirulina, slippery elm bark, sorghum bran hi-tannin, sorghum grain hi-tannin, sumac bran, comfrey leaf and root, goji berries, gutu kola, thyme, turmeric, uva ursi, valerian, wild yam root, wintergreen, yacon root, yellow dock, yerba mate, yerba santa, bacopa monniera, withania somnifera, Lion's mane, and silybum marianum. Such botanical materials may be provided in fresh or dry form, essential oils, or may be in the form of an extracts. The botanical materials (as well as their extracts) often include compounds from various classes known to provide antioxidant effects, such as minerals, vitamins, isoflavones, phytoesterols, allyl sulfides, dithiolthiones, isothiocyanates, indoles, lignans, flavonoids, polyphenols, and carotenoids. Examples of compounds found in botanical extracts or oils include ascorbic acid, peanut endocarb, resveratrol, sulforaphane, beta-carotene, lycopene, lutein, co-enzyme Q, carnitine, quercetin, kaempferol, and the like. See, e.g., Santhosh et al., Phytomedicine, 12(2005) 216-220, which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Non-limiting examples of other suitable antioxidants include citric acid, Vitamin E or a derivative thereof, a tocopherol, epicatechol, epigallocatechol, epigallocatechol gallate, erythorbic acid, sodium erythorbate, 4-hexylresorcinol, theaflavin, theaflavin monogallate A or B, theaflavin digallate, phenolic acids, glycosides, quercitrin, isoquercitrin, hyperoside, polyphenols, catechols, resveratrols, oleuropein, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), tertiary butylhydroquinone (TBHQ), and combinations thereof.
  • When present, an antioxidant is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.001%, about 0.005%, about 0.01% w/w, about 0.05%, about 0.1%, or about 0.5%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10%, based on the total weight of the mixture/composition.
  • Nicotine component
  • In some embodiments, the pouched products of the present disclosure can include a nicotinic compound. Various nicotinic compounds, and methods for their administration, are set forth in US Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0274628 to Borschke , which is incorporated herein by reference. As used herein, "nicotinic compound" or "source of nicotine" often refers to naturally-occurring or synthetic nicotinic compound unbound from a plant material, meaning the compound is at least partially purified and not contained within a plant structure, such as a tobacco leaf. Most preferably, nicotine is naturally-occurring and obtained as an extract from a Nicotiana species (e.g., tobacco). The nicotine can have the enantiomeric form S(-)-nicotine, R(+)-nicotine, or a mixture of S(-)-nicotine and R(+)-nicotine. Most preferably, the nicotine is in the form of S(-)-nicotine (e.g., in a form that is virtually all S(-)-nicotine) or a racemic mixture composed primarily or predominantly of S(-)-nicotine (e.g., a mixture composed of about 95 weight parts S(-)-nicotine and about 5 weight parts R(+)-nicotine). Most preferably, the nicotine is employed in virtually pure form or in an essentially pure form. Highly preferred nicotine that is employed has a purity of greater than about 95 percent, more preferably greater than about 98 percent, and most preferably greater than about 99 percent, on a weight basis.
  • In some embodiments, a nicotine component may be included in the composition in free base form, salt form, as a complex, or as a solvate. By "nicotine component" is meant any suitable form of nicotine (e.g., free base or salt) for providing oral absorption of at least a portion of the nicotine present. Typically, the nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base and a nicotine salt. In some embodiments, nicotine is in its free base form, which easily can be adsorbed in for example, a microcrystalline cellulose material to form a microcrystalline cellulose-nicotine carrier complex. See, for example, the discussion of nicotine in free base form in US Pat. Pub. No. 2004/0191322 to Hansson , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • In some embodiments, at least a portion of the nicotine can be employed in the form of a salt. Salts of nicotine can be provided using the types of ingredients and techniques set forth in US Pat. No. 2,033,909 to Cox et al. and Perfetti, Beitrage Tabakforschung Int., 12: 43-54 (1983), which are incorporated herein by reference. Additionally, salts of nicotine are available from sources such as Pfaltz and Bauer, Inc. and K&K Laboratories, Division of ICN Biochemicals, Inc. Typically, the nicotine component is selected from the group consisting of nicotine free base, a nicotine salt such as hydrochloride, dihydrochloride, monotartrate, bitartrate, sulfate, salicylate, and nicotine zinc chloride. In some embodiments, the nicotine component or a portion thereof is a nicotine salt with one or more organic acids, as explained more fully below.
  • In some embodiments, at least a portion of the nicotine can be in the form of a resin complex of nicotine, where nicotine is bound in an ion-exchange resin, such as nicotine polacrilex, which is nicotine bound to, for example, a polymethacrilic acid, such as Amberlite IRP64, Purolite C115HMR, or Doshion P551. See, for example, US Pat. No. 3,901,248 to Lichtneckert et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference. Another example is a nicotine-polyacrylic carbomer complex, such as with Carbopol 974P. In some embodiments, nicotine may be present in the form of a nicotine polyacrylic complex.
  • In some embodiments, it may be desirable to provide a basic amine-containing oral product configured for oral use which retains the initial basic amine content (e.g., nicotine content) during storage, and which delivers substantially the full amount of basic amine (e.g., nicotine) initially present in the oral product. In some such embodiments, nicotine or other basic amine is employed in association with at least a portion of an organic acid or an alkali metal salt thereof (referred to herein as "ion pairing").
  • As disclosed herein, at least a portion of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine) is associated with at least a portion of the organic acid or the alkali metal salt thereof. Depending on multiple variables (concentration, pH, nature of the organic acid, and the like), the basic amine present in the composition can exist in multiple forms, including ion paired, in solution (i.e., fully solvated), as the free base, as a cation, as a salt, or any combination thereof. The relative amounts of the various components within the oral product composition may vary, and typically are selected so as to provide the desired sensory and performance characteristics to the oral product. In some embodiments, the association between the basic amine and at least a portion of the organic acid or the alkali metal salt thereof is in the form of an ion pair between the basic amine and a conjugate base of the organic acid.
  • Ion pairing describes the partial association of oppositely charged ions in relatively concentrated solutions to form distinct chemical species called ion pairs. The strength of the association (i.e., the ion pairing) depends on the electrostatic force of attraction between the positive and negative ions (i.e., a protonated basic amine such as nicotine, and the conjugate base of the organic acid). By "conjugate base" is meant the base resulting from deprotonation of the corresponding acid (e.g., benzoate is the conjugate base of benzoic acid). On average, a certain population of these ion pairs exists at any given time, although the formation and dissociation of ion pairs is continuous. In the oral products as disclosed herein, and/or upon oral use of said oral products (e.g., upon contact with saliva), the basic amine, for example nicotine, and the conjugate base of the organic acid exist at least partially in the form of an ion pair. Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that such ion pairing may minimize chemical degradation of the basic amine and/or enhance the oral availability of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine). At alkaline pH values (e.g., such as from about 7.5 to about 9), certain basic amines, for example nicotine, are largely present in the free base form, which has relatively low water solubility, and low stability with respect to evaporation and oxidative decomposition, but high mucosal availability. Conversely, at acidic pH values (such as from about 6.5 to about 4), certain basic amines, for example nicotine, are largely present in a protonated form, which has relatively high water solubility, and higher stability with respect to evaporation and oxidative decomposition, but low mucosal availability.
  • It has been found that the properties of stability, solubility, and availability of the nicotine in a composition configured for oral use can be mutually enhanced through ion pairing or salt formation of nicotine with appropriate organic acids and/or their conjugate bases. Specifically, nicotine-organic acid ion pairs of moderate lipophilicity result in favorable stability and absorption properties. Lipophilicity is conveniently measured in terms of logP, the partition coefficient of a molecule between a lipophilic phase and an aqueous phase, usually octanol and water, respectively. An octanol-water partitioning favoring distribution of a basic amine-organic acid ion pair into octanol is predictive of good absorption of the basic amine present in the composition through the oral mucosa.
  • As noted above, at alkaline pH values (e.g., such as from about 7.5 to about 9), nicotine is largely present in the free base form (and accordingly, a high partitioning into octanol), while at acidic pH values (such as from about 6.5 to about 4), nicotine is largely present in a protonated form (and accordingly, a low partitioning into octanol). An ion pair between certain organic acids (e.g., having a logP value of from about 1.4 to about 8.0. such as from about 1.4 to about 4.5, allows nicotine partitioning into octanol consistent with that predicted for nicotine partitioning into octanol at a pH of 8.4.
  • One of skill in the art will recognize that the extent of ion pairing in the disclosed composition, both before and during use by the consumer, may vary based on, for example, pH, the nature of the organic acid, the concentration of nicotine, the concentration of the organic acid or conjugate base of the organic acid present in the composition, the water content of the composition, the ionic strength of the composition, and the like. One of skill in the art will also recognize that ion pairing is an equilibrium process influenced by the foregoing variables. Accordingly, quantification of the extent of ion pairing is difficult or impossible by calculation or direct observation. However, as disclosed herein, the presence of ion pairing may be demonstrated through surrogate measures such as partitioning of the nicotine between octanol and water or membrane permeation of aqueous solutions of the basic amine plus organic acids and/or their conjugate bases.
  • Typically, the nicotine component (calculated as the free base) when present, is in a concentration of at least about 0.001% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.001% to about 10%. In some embodiments, the nicotine component is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, calculated as the free base and based on the total weight of the composition. In some embodiments, the nicotine component is present in a concentration from about 0.1% w/w to about 3% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.1% w/w to about 2.5%, from about 0.1% to about 2.0%, from about 0.1% to about 1.5%, or from about 0.1% to about 1% by weight, calculated as the free base and based on the total weight of the composition. These ranges can also apply to other active ingredients noted herein.
  • In some embodiments, the products or compositions of the disclosure can be characterized as free of any nicotine component (e.g., any embodiment as disclosed herein may be completely or substantially free of any nicotine component). By "substantially free" is meant that no nicotine has been intentionally added, beyond trace amounts that may be naturally present in e.g., a botanical material. For example, some embodiments can be characterized as having less than 0.001% by weight of nicotine, or less than 0.0001%, or even 0% by weight of nicotine, calculated as the free base.
  • Organic Acid
  • As used herein, the term "organic acid" refers to an organic (i.e., carbon-based) compound that is characterized by acidic properties. Typically, organic acids are relatively weak acids (i.e., they do not dissociate completely in the presence of water), such as carboxylic acids (-CO2H) or sulfonic acids (-SO2OH). As used herein, reference to organic acid means an organic acid that is intentionally added. In this regard, an organic acid may be intentionally added as a specific composition ingredient as opposed to merely being inherently present as a component of another composition ingredient (e.g., the small amount of organic acid which may inherently be present in a composition ingredient, such as a tobacco material).
  • Suitable organic acids will typically have a range of lipophilicities (i.e., a polarity giving an appropriate balance of water and organic solubility). Typically, lipophilicities of suitable organic acids, as indicated by logP, will vary between about 1.4 and about 4.5 (more soluble in octanol than in water). In some embodiments, the organic acid has a logP value of from about 1.5 to about 4.0, e.g., from about 1.5, about 2.0, about 2.5, or about 3.0, to about 3.5, about 4.0, about 4.5, or about 5.0. Particularly suitable organic acids have a logP value of from about 1.7 to about 4, such as from about 2.0, about 2.5, or about 3.0, to about 3.5, or about 4.0. In some embodiments, the organic acid has a logP value of about 2.5 to about 3.5. In some embodiments, organic acids outside this range may also be utilized for various purposes and in various amounts, as described further herein below. For example, in some embodiments, the organic acid may have a logP value of greater than about 4.5, such as from about 4.5 to about 8.0. Particularly, the presence of certain solvents or solubilizing agents (e.g., inclusion in the composition of glycerin or propylene glycol) may extend the range of lipophilicity (i.e., values of logP higher than 4.5, such as from about 4.5 to about 8.0).
  • Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that moderately lipophilic organic acids (e.g., logP of from about 1.4 to about 4.5) produce ion pairs with nicotine which are of a polarity providing good octanol-water partitioning of the ion pair, and hence partitioning of nicotine, into octanol versus water. As discussed above, such partitioning into octanol is predictive of favorable oral availability. In some embodiments, the organic acid has a log P value of from about 1.4 to about 4.5, such as about 1.5, about 2, about 2.5, about 3, about 3.5, about 4 or about 4.5. In some embodiments, the organic acid has a log P value of from about 2.5 to about 3.5.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is a carboxylic acid or a sulfonic acid. The carboxylic acid or sulfonic acid functional group may be attached to any alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group having, for example, from one to twenty carbon atoms (C1-C20). In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl carboxylic or sulfonic acid.
  • As used herein, "alkyl" refers to any straight chain or branched chain hydrocarbon. The alkyl group may be saturated (i.e., having all sp3 carbon atoms), or may be unsaturated (i.e., having at least one site of unsaturation). As used herein, the term "unsaturated" refers to the presence of a carbon-carbon, sp2 double bond in one or more positions within the alkyl group. Unsaturated alkyl groups may be mono- or polyunsaturated. Representative straight chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl, n-pentyl, and n-hexyl. Branched chain alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, isopropyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tert-butyl, isopentyl, and 2-methylbutyl. Representative unsaturated alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethylene or vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, isobutylenyl, 1-pentenyl, 2-pentenyl, 3-methyl-1-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, 2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, and the like. An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • "Cycloalkyl" as used herein refers to a carbocyclic group, which may be mono- or bicyclic. Cycloalkyl groups include rings having 3 to 7 carbon atoms as a monocycle or 7 to 12 carbon atoms as a bicycle. Examples of monocyclic cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted, and may include one or more sites of unsaturation (e.g., cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl).
  • The term "aryl" as used herein refers to a carbocyclic aromatic group. Examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to, phenyl and naphthyl. An aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • "Heteroaryl" and "heterocycloalkyl" as used herein refer to an aromatic or non-aromatic ring system, respectively, in which one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl group comprises up to 20 carbon atoms and from 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S. A heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl may be a monocycle having 3 to 7 ring members (for example, 2 to 6 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S) or a bicycle having 7 to 10 ring members (for example, 4 to 9 carbon atoms and 1 to 3 heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S), for example: a bicyclo[4,5], [5,5], [5,6], or [6,6] system. Examples of heteroaryl groups include by way of example and not limitation, pyridyl, thiazolyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrimidinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, tetrazolyl, benzofuranyl, thianaphthalenyl, indolyl, indolenyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyridazinyl, indolizinyl, isoindolyl, 3H-indolyl, 1H-indazolyl, purinyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, pteridinyl, 4aH-carbazolyl, carbazolyl, phenanthridinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidinyl, phenanthrolinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, furazanyl, phenoxazinyl, isochromanyl, chromanyl, imidazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, benzotriazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, and isatinoyl. Examples of heterocycloalkyls include by way of example and not limitation, dihydroypyridyl, tetrahydropyridyl (piperidyl), tetrahydrothiophenyl, piperidinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidonyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, bis-tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, decahydroquinolinyl, octahydroisoquinolinyl, piperazinyl, quinuclidinyl, and morpholinyl. Heteroaryl and heterocycloalkyl groups can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • "Substituted" as used herein and as applied to any of the above alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl, means that one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with a substituent. Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, -Cl, Br, F, alkyl, - OH, -OCH3, NH2, -NHCH3, -N(CH3)2, -CN, -NC(=O)CH3, -C(=O)-, -C(=O)NH2, and - C(=O)N(CH3)2. Wherever a group is described as "optionally substituted," that group can be substituted with one or more of the above substituents, independently selected for each occasion. In some embodiments, the substituent may be one or more methyl groups or one or more hydroxyl groups.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl carboxylic acid. Non-limiting examples of alkyl carboxylic acids include formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, heptanoic acid, octanoic acid, nonanoic acid, decanoic acid, undecanoic acid, dodecanoic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, linoleic acid, linolenic acid, and the like.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is an alkyl sulfonic acid. Non-limiting examples of alkyl sulfonic acids include propanesulfonic acid, heptanesulfonic acid, and octanesulfonic acid.
  • In some embodiments, the alkyl carboxylic or sulfonic acid is substituted with one or more hydroxyl groups. Non-limiting examples include glycolic acid, 4-hydroxybutyric acid, and lactic acid.
  • In some embodiments, an organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group or more than one sulfonic acid group (e.g., two, three, or more carboxylic acid groups). Non-limiting examples include oxalic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, and glutaric acid. In organic acids containing multiple carboxylic acids (e.g., from two to four carboxylic acid groups), one or more of the carboxylic acid groups may be esterified. Non-limiting examples include succinic acid monoethyl ester, monomethyl fumarate, monomethyl or dimethyl citrate, and the like.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid may include more than one carboxylic acid group and one or more hydroxyl groups. Non-limiting examples of such acids include tartaric acid, citric acid, and the like.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is an aryl carboxylic acid or an aryl sulfonic acid. Non-limiting examples of aryl carboxylic and sulfonic acids include benzoic acid, toluic acids, salicylic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.
  • Further non-limiting examples of organic acids which may be useful in some embodiments include dibenzoyl-L-tartaric acid, 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4-acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid (L), aspartic acid (L), alpha-methylbutyric acid, camphoric acid (+), camphor-10-sulfonic acid (+), cinnamic acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane-1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, furoic acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, glucoheptonic acid, gluconic acid, glucuronic acid, glutamic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, isobutyric acid, isovaleric acid, lactobionic acid, lauric acid, levulinic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalene-1,5-disulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, oleic acid, palmitic acid, pamoic acid, phenylacetic acid, pyroglutamic acid, pyruvic acid, sebacic acid, stearic acid, and undecylenic acid.
  • Examples of suitable acids include, but are not limited to, the list of organic acids in Table 1. Table 1. Non-limiting examples of suitable organic acids
    Acid Name log(P)*
    benzoic acid 1.9
    phenylacetic 1.4
    p-toluic acid 2.3
    ethyl benzoic acid 2.9
    isopropyl benzoic acid 3.5
    4-phenylbutyric 2.4
    2-(4-Isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid 3.5
    2-napthoxyacetic acid 2.5
    napthylacetic acid 2.7
    heptanoic acid 2.5
    octanoic acid 3.05
    nonanoic acid 3.5
    decanoic acid 4.09
    9-deceneoic acid 3.3
    2-deceneoic acid 3.8
    10-undecenoic acid 3.9
    dodecandioic acid 3.2
    dodecanoic acid 4.6
    myristic acid 5.3
    palmitic acid 6.4
    stearic acid 7.6
    cyclohexanebutanoic acid 3.4
    1-heptanesulfonic acid 2.0
    1-octanesulfonic acid 2.5
    1-nonanesulfonic acid 3.1
    monooctyl succinate 2.8
    tocopherol succinate 10.2
    monomenthyl succinate 3
    monomenthyl glutarate 3.4
    norbixin ((2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16E,18E)-4,8,13,17- tetramethylicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid) 7.2
    bixin ((2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16Z,18E)-20-methoxy-4,8,13,17-tetramethyl-20-oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenoic acid) 7.5
    *Values obtained from PubChem or calculated
  • The selection of organic acid may further depend on additional properties in addition to consideration of the logP value. For example, an organic acid should be one recognized as safe for human consumption, and which has acceptable flavor, odor, volatility, stability, and the like. Determination of appropriate organic acids is within the purview of one of skill in the art.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is a mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid or a polycarboxylic acid. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the dicarboxylic acid is succinic acid, glutaric acid, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the alcohol forming the mono ester of the dicarboxylic acid is a lipophilic alcohol. Examples of suitable lipophilic alcohols include, but are not limited to, octanol, menthol, and tocopherol. In some embodiments, the organic acid is an octyl mono ester of a dicarboxylic acid, such as monooctyl succinate, monooctyl fumarate, or the like. In some embodiments, the organic acid is a monomenthyl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain menthyl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the cooling sensation they may provide upon use of the product comprising the composition. In some embodiments, the organic acid is monomenthyl succinate, monomenthyl fumarate, monomenthyl glutarate, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the organic acid is a monotocopheryl ester of a dicarboxylic acid. Certain tocopheryl esters may be desirable in oral compositions as described herein by virtue of the antioxidant effects they may provide. In some embodiments, the organic acid is tocopheryl succinate, tocopheryl fumarate, tocopheryl glutarate, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids. Carotenoids are tetraterpenes, meaning that they are produced from 8 isoprene molecules and contain 40 carbon atoms. Accordingly, they are usually lipophilic due to the presence of long unsaturated aliphatic chains, and are generally yellow, orange, or red in color. Certain carotenoid derivatives can be advantageous in oral compositions by virtue of providing both ion pairing and serving as a colorant in the composition. In some embodiments, the organic acid is 2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16Z,18E)-20-methoxy-4,8,13,17-tetramethyl-20-oxoicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenoic acid (bixin) or an isomer thereof. Bixin is an apocarotenoid found in annatto seeds from the achiote tree (Bixa orellana), and is the naturally occurring pigment providing the reddish orange color to annatto. Bixin is soluble in fats and alcohols but insoluble in water, and is chemically unstable when isolated, converting via isomerization into the double bond isomer, trans-bixin (β-bixin), having the structure:
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is (2E,4E,6E,8E,10E,12E,14E,16E,18E)-4,8,13,17-tetramethylicosa-2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,18-nonaenedioic acid (norbixin), a water soluble hydrolysis product of bixin having the structure:
  • In some embodiments, more than one organic acid may be present. For example, the composition may comprise two, or three, or four, or more organic acids. Accordingly, reference herein to "an organic acid" contemplates mixtures of two or more organic acids. The relative amounts of the multiple organic acids may vary. For example, a composition may comprise equal amounts of two, or three, or more organic acids, or may comprise different relative amounts. In this manner, it is possible to include certain organic acids (e.g., citric acid or myristic acid) which have a logP value outside the desired range, when combined with other organic acids to provide the desired average logP range for the combination. In some embodiments, it may be desirable to include organic acids in the composition which have logP values outside the desired range for purposes such as, but not limited to, providing desirable organoleptic properties, stability, as flavor components, and the like. Further, certain lipophilic organic acids have undesirable flavor and or aroma characteristics which would preclude their presence as the sole organic acid (e.g., in equimolar or greater quantities relative to nicotine). Without wishing to be bound by theory, it is believed that a combination of different organic acids may provide the desired ion pairing while the concentration of any single organic acid in the composition remains below the threshold which would be found objectionable from a sensory perspective.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid which is a monoester of a dicarboxylic acid or is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids as described herein above, and further comprises an additional organic acid or salt thereof. In some embodiments, the additional organic acid is benzoic acid, an alkali metal salt thereof, or a combination thereof.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises an alkali metal salt of an organic acid. For example, at least a portion of the organic acid may be present in the composition in the form of an alkali metal salt. Suitable alkali metal salts include lithium, sodium, and potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium or potassium. In some embodiments, the alkali metal is sodium. In some embodiments, the composition comprises an organic acid and a sodium salt of the organic acid.
  • In some embodiments, the weight ratio of the organic acid to the sodium salt (or other alkali metal) of the organic acid is from about 0.1 to about 10, such as from about 0.1, about 0.25, about 0.3, about 0.5, about 0.75, or about 1, to about 2, about 5, or about 10. For example, in some embodiments, both an organic acid and the sodium salt thereof are added to the other components of the composition, wherein the organic acid is added in excess of the sodium salt, in equimolar quantities with the sodium salt, or as a fraction of the sodium salt. One of skill in the art will recognize that the relative amounts will be determined by the desired pH of the composition, as well as the desired ionic strength. For example, the organic acid may be added in a quantity to provide a desired pH level of the composition, while the alkali metal (e.g., sodium) salt is added in a quantity to provide the desired extent of ion pairing. As one of skill in the art will understand, the quantity of organic acid (i.e., the protonated form) present in the composition, relative to the alkali metal salt or conjugate base form present in the composition, will vary according to the pH of the composition and the pKa of the organic acid, as well as according to the actual relative quantities initially added to the composition.
  • The amount of organic acid or alkali metal salt thereof present in the composition, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), may vary. Generally, as the concentration of the organic acid (or the conjugate base thereof) increases, the percent of basic amine (e.g., nicotine) that is ion paired with the organic acid increases. This typically increases the partitioning of the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), in the form of an ion pair, into octanol versus water as measured by the logP (the log10 of the partitioning coefficient). In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 0.05, about 0.1, about 1, about 1.5, about 2, or about 5, to about 10, about 15, or about 20 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), calculated as the free base of the basic amine.
  • In some embodiments, the composition comprises from about 2 to about 10, or from about 2 to about 5 molar equivalents of the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof, relative to the basic amine (e.g., nicotine), on a free-base basis. In some embodiments, the organic acid, the alkali metal salt thereof, or the combination thereof, is present in a molar ratio with basic amine (e.g., nicotine) from about 2, about 3, about 4, or about 5, to about 6, about 7, about 8, about 9, or about 10. In embodiments wherein more than one organic acid, alkali metal salt thereof, or both, are present, it is to be understood that such molar ratios reflect the totality of the organic acids present.
  • In some embodiments the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.0 to about 9.0, such as from about 4.5 to about 7.0, or from about 5.5 to about 7.0, from about 4.0 to about 5.5, or from about 7.0 to about 9.0. In some embodiments, the organic acid inclusion is sufficient to provide a composition pH of from about 4.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 4.5, about 5.0, or about 5.5, to about 6.0, or about 6.5. In some embodiments, the organic acid is provided in a quantity sufficient to provide a pH of the composition of from about 5.5 to about 6.5, for example, from about 5.5, about 5.6, about 5.7, about 5.8, about 5.9, or about 6.0, to about 6.1, about 6.2, about 6.3, about 6.4, or about 6.5. In some embodiments, a mineral acid (e.g., hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, or the like) is added to adjust the pH of the composition to the desired value.
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the alkali metal salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the organic acid and the basic amine (e.g., nicotine) are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such. In some embodiments, the organic acid and basic amine (e.g., nicotine) are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
  • In some embodiments, the organic acid is added as the free acid, either neat (i.e., native solid or liquid form) or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the alkali metal salt of the organic acid is added, either neat or as a solution in, e.g., water, to the other composition components. In some embodiments, the organic acid and the basic amine (e.g., nicotine) are combined to form a salt, either before addition to the composition, or the salt is formed within and is present in the composition as such. In some embodiments, the organic acid and basic amine (e.g., nicotine) are present as individual components in the composition, and form an ion pair upon contact with moisture (e.g., saliva in the mouth of the consumer).
  • In some embodiments, the oral composition comprises nicotine benzoate and sodium benzoate, wherein at least a portion of the nicotine and benzoate ions present are in an ion paired form. In some embodiments, the composition comprises nicotine benzoate, sodium benzoate, and an organic acid, an alkali metal salt of an organic acid, or a combination thereof, the organic acid having a logP value from about 1 to about 12, wherein the organic acid is a monoester of a dicarboxylic acid or is a carotenoid derivative having one or more carboxylic acids.
  • In some embodiments, the oral composition further comprises a solubility enhancer to increase the solubility of one or more of the organic acid or salt thereof. Suitable solubility enhancers include, but are not limited to, humectants as described herein, such as glycerol or propylene glycol.
  • Cannabinoid
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises one or more cannabinoids. As used herein, the term "cannabinoid" refers to a class of diverse chemical compounds that acts on cannabinoid receptors, also known as the endocannabinoid system, in cells that alter neurotransmitter release in the brain. Ligands for these receptor proteins include the endocannabinoids produced naturally in the body by animals; phytocannabinoids, found in cannabis; and synthetic cannabinoids, manufactured artificially. Cannabinoids found in cannabis include, without limitation: cannabigerol (CBG), cannabichromene (CBC), cannabidiol (CBD), tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), cannabinol (CBN), cannabinodiol (CBDL), cannabicyclol (CBL), cannabivarin (CBV), tetrahydrocannabivarin (THCV), cannabidivarin (CBDV), cannabichromevarin (CBCV), cannabigerovarin (CBGV), cannabigerol monomethyl ether (CBGM), cannabinerolic acid, cannabidiolic acid (CBDA), cannabinol propyl variant (CBNV), cannabitriol (CBO), tetrahydrocannabinolic acid (THCA), and tetrahydrocannabivarinic acid (THCV A). In some embodiments, the cannabinoid is selected from tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), the primary psychoactive compound in cannabis, and/or cannabidiol (CBD) another major constituent of the plant, but which is devoid of psychoactivity. All of the above compounds can be used in the form of an isolate from plant material or synthetically derived.
  • In some embodiments, the cannabinoid (e.g., CBD) is added to the composition in the form of an isolate. An isolate is an extract from a plant, such as cannabis, where the active material of interest (in this case the cannabinoid, such as CBD) is present in a high degree of purity, for example greater than 95%, greater than 96%, greater than 97%, greater than 98%, or around 99% purity.
  • In some embodiments, the cannabinoid is an isolate of CBD in a high degree of purity, and the amount of any other cannabinoid in the composition is no greater than about 1% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.5% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as no greater than about 0.01% by weight of the composition.
  • Alternatively, the active ingredient can be a cannabimimetic, which is a class of compounds derived from plants other than cannabis that have biological effects on the endocannabinoid system similar to cannabinoids. Examples include yangonin, alpha-amyrin or beta-amyrin (also classified as terpenes), cyanidin, curcumin (tumeric), catechin, quercetin, salvinorin A, N-acylethanolamines, and N-alkylamide lipids.
  • When present, a cannabinoid (e.g., CBD) or cannabimimetic is typically in a concentration of at least about 0.1% by weight of the composition, such as in a range from about 0.1% to about 30%, such as, e.g., from about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, or about 0.9%, to about 1%, about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, about 10%, about 15%, about 20%, or about 30% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition. The choice of cannabinoid and the particular percentages thereof which may be present within the disclosed composition will vary depending upon the desired flavor, texture, and other characteristics of the composition.
  • Terpene
  • Active ingredients suitable for use in the present disclosure can also be classified as terpenes, many of which are associated with biological effects, such as calming effects. Terpenes are understood to have the general formula of (CsHs)n and include monoterpenes, sesquiterpenes, and diterpenes. Terpenes can be acyclic, monocyclic or bicyclic in structure. Some terpenes provide an entourage effect when used in combination with cannabinoids or cannabimimetics. Examples include beta-caryophyllene, linalool, limonene, beta-citronellol, linalyl acetate, pinene (alpha or beta), geraniol, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, and germacrene, which may be used singly or in combination.
  • In some embodiments, the terpene is a terpene derivable from a phytocannabinoid producing plant, such as a plant from the strain of the cannabis sativa species, such as hemp. Suitable terpenes in this regard include so-called "C10" terpenes, which are those terpenes comprising 10 carbon atoms, and so-called "C15" terpenes, which are those terpenes comprising 15 carbon atoms. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises more than one terpene. For example, the active ingredient may comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten or more terpenes as defined herein. In some embodiments, the terpene is selected from pinene (alpha and beta), geraniol, linalool, limonene, carvone, eucalyptol, menthone, iso-menthone, piperitone, myrcene, beta-bourbonene, germacrene and mixtures thereof.
  • Pharmaceutical ingredient
  • In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises an active pharmaceutical ingredient (API). The API can be any known agent adapted for therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic use. These can include, for example, synthetic organic compounds, proteins and peptides, polysaccharides and other sugars, lipids, phospholipids, inorganic compounds (e.g., magnesium, selenium, zinc, nitrate), neurotransmitters or precursors thereof (e.g., serotonin, 5-hydroxytryptophan, oxitriptan, acetylcholine, dopamine, melatonin), and nucleic acid sequences, having therapeutic, prophylactic, or diagnostic activity. Non-limiting examples of APIs include analgesics and antipyretics (e.g., acetylsalicylic acid, acetaminophen, 3-(4-isobutylphenyl)propanoic acid), phosphatidylserine, myoinositol, docosahexaenoic acid (DHA, Omega-3), arachidonic acid (AA, Omega-6), S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), beta-hydroxy-beta-methylbutyrate (HMB), citicoline (cytidine-5'-diphosphate-choline), and cotinine. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises citicoline. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of citicoline, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng. In some embodiments, the active ingredient comprises sunflower lecithin. In some embodiments, the active ingredient is a combination of sunflower lecithin, caffeine, theanine, and ginseng.
  • The amount of API may vary. For example, when present, an API is typically at a concentration of from about 0.001% w/w to about 10% by weight, such as, e.g., from about 0.01%, about 0.02%, about 0.03%, about 0.04%, about 0.05%, about 0.06%, about 0.07%, about 0.08%, about 0.09%, about 0.1% w/w, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5% about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, or about 1%, to about 2%, about 3%, about 4%, about 5%, about 6%, about 7%, about 8%, about 9%, or about 10% by weight, based on the total weight of the composition.
  • In some embodiments, the composition is substantially free of any API. By "substantially free of any API" means that the composition does not contain, and specifically excludes, the presence of any API as defined herein, such as any Food and Drug Administration (FDA) approved therapeutic agent intended to treat any medical condition.
  • Tobacco Material
  • In some embodiments, the composition may include a tobacco material. The tobacco material can vary in species, type, and form. Generally, the tobacco material is obtained from for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species. Example Nicotiana species include N. tabacum, N. rustica, N. alata, N. arentsii, N. excelsior, N. forgetiana, N. glauca, N. glutinosa, N. gossei, N. kawakamii, N. knightiana, N. langsdorffi, N. otophora, N. setchelli, N. sylvestris, N. tomentosa, N. tomentosiformis, N. undulata, N. x sanderae, N. africana, N. amplexicaulis, N. benavidesii, N. bonariensis, N. debneyi, N. longiflora, N. maritina, N. megalosiphon, N. occidentalis, N. paniculata, N. plumbaginifolia, N. raimondii, N. rosulata, N. simulans, N. stocktonii, N. suaveolens, N. umbratica, N. velutina, N. wigandioides, N. acaulis, N. acuminata, N. attenuata, N. benthamiana, N. cavicola, N. clevelandii, N. cordifolia, N. corymbosa, N. fragrans, N. goodspeedii, N. linearis, N. miersii, N. nudicaulis, N. obtusifolia, N. occidentalis subsp. Hersperis, N. pauciflora, N. petunioides, N. quadrivalvis, N. repanda, N. rotundifolia, N. solanifolia, and N. spegazzinii. Various representative other types of plants from the Nicotiana species are set forth in Goodspeed, The Genus Nicotiana, (Chonica Botanica) (1954); US Pat. Nos. 4,660,577 to Sensabaugh, Jr. et al. ; 5,387,416 to White et al. , 7,025,066 to Lawson et al. ; 7,798,153 to Lawrence, Jr . and 8,186,360 to Marshall et al. ; each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Descriptions of various types of tobaccos, growing practices and harvesting practices are set forth in Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology, Davis et al. (Eds.) (1999), which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Nicotiana species from which suitable tobacco materials can be obtained can be derived using genetic-modification or crossbreeding techniques (e.g., tobacco plants can be genetically engineered or crossbred to increase or decrease production of components, characteristics or attributes). See, for example, the types of genetic modifications of plants set forth in US Pat. Nos. 5,539,093 to Fitzmaurice et al. ; 5,668,295 to Wahab et al. ; 5,705,624 to Fitzmaurice et al. ; 5,844,119 to Weigl ; 6,730,832 to Dominguez et al. ; 7,173,170 to Liu et al. ; 7,208,659 to Colliver et al. and 7,230,160 to Benning et al. ; US Patent Appl. Pub. No. 2006/0236434 to Conkling et al. ; and PCT WO2008/103935 to Nielsen et al. See, also, the types of tobaccos that are set forth in US Pat. Nos. 4,660,577 to Sensabaugh, Jr. et al. ; 5,387,416 to White et al. ; and 6,730,832 to Dominguez et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The Nicotiana species can, in some embodiments, be selected for the content of various compounds that are present therein. For example, plants can be selected on the basis that those plants produce relatively high quantities of one or more of the compounds desired to be isolated therefrom. In some embodiments, plants of the Nicotiana species (e.g., Galpao commun tobacco) are specifically grown for their abundance of leaf surface compounds. Tobacco plants can be grown in greenhouses, growth chambers, or outdoors in fields, or grown hydroponically.
  • Various parts or portions of the plant of the Nicotiana species can be included within a mixture as disclosed herein. For example, virtually all of the plant (e.g., the whole plant) can be harvested, and employed as such. Alternatively, various parts or pieces of the plant can be harvested or separated for further use after harvest. For example, the flower, leaves, stem, stalk, roots, seeds, and various combinations thereof, can be isolated for further use or treatment. In some embodiments, the tobacco material comprises tobacco leaf (lamina). The mixture disclosed herein can include processed tobacco parts or pieces, cured and aged tobacco in essentially natural lamina and/or stem form, a tobacco extract, extracted tobacco pulp (e.g., using water as a solvent), or a mixture of the foregoing (e.g., a mixture that combines extracted tobacco pulp with granulated cured and aged natural tobacco lamina).
  • In some embodiments, the tobacco material comprises solid tobacco material selected from the group consisting of lamina and stems. The tobacco that is used for the mixture most preferably includes tobacco lamina, or a tobacco lamina and stem mixture (of which at least a portion is smoke-treated). Portions of the tobaccos within the mixture may have processed forms, such as processed tobacco stems (e.g., cut-rolled stems, cut-rolled-expanded stems or cut-puffed stems), or volume expanded tobacco (e.g., puffed tobacco, such as dry ice expanded tobacco (DIET)). See, for example, the tobacco expansion processes set forth in US Pat. Nos. 4,340,073 to de la Burde et al. ; 5,259,403 to Guy et al. ; and 5,908,032 to Poindexter, et al. ; and 7,556,047 to Poindexter, et al. , all of which are incorporated by reference. In addition, the d mixture optionally may incorporate tobacco that has been fermented. See, also, the types of tobacco processing techniques set forth in PCT WO2005/063060 to Atchley et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The tobacco material is typically used in a form that can be described as particulate (i.e., shredded, ground, granulated, or powder form). The manner by which the tobacco material is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary. Preferably, plant parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a particulate form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like. Most preferably, the plant material is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like. For example, tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent or less than about 5 weight percent. Most preferably, the tobacco material is employed in the form of parts or pieces that have an average particle size between 1.4 millimeters and 250 microns. In some instances, the tobacco particles may be sized to pass through a screen mesh to obtain the particle size range required. If desired, air classification equipment may be used to ensure that small sized tobacco particles of the desired sizes, or range of sizes, may be collected. If desired, differently sized pieces of granulated tobacco may be mixed together.
  • The manner by which the tobacco is provided in a finely divided or powder type of form may vary. Preferably, tobacco parts or pieces are comminuted, ground or pulverized into a powder type of form using equipment and techniques for grinding, milling, or the like. Most preferably, the tobacco is relatively dry in form during grinding or milling, using equipment such as hammer mills, cutter heads, air control mills, or the like. For example, tobacco parts or pieces may be ground or milled when the moisture content thereof is less than about 15 weight percent to less than about 5 weight percent. For example, the tobacco plant or portion thereof can be separated into individual parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be removed from the stems, and/or the stems and leaves can be removed from the stalk). The harvested plant or individual parts or pieces can be further subdivided into parts or pieces (e.g., the leaves can be shredded, cut, comminuted, pulverized, milled or ground into pieces or parts that can be characterized as filler-type pieces, granules, particulates or fine powders). The plant, or parts thereof, can be subjected to external forces or pressure (e.g., by being pressed or subjected to roll treatment). When carrying out such processing conditions, the plant or portion thereof can have a moisture content that approximates its natural moisture content (e.g., its moisture content immediately upon harvest), a moisture content achieved by adding moisture to the plant or portion thereof, or a moisture content that results from the drying of the plant or portion thereof. For example, powdered, pulverized, ground or milled pieces of plants or portions thereof can have moisture contents of less than about 25 weight percent, often less than about 20 weight percent, and frequently less than about 15 weight percent.
  • For the preparation of oral products, it is typical for a harvested plant of the Nicotiana species to be subjected to a curing process. The tobacco materials incorporated within the mixture for inclusion within products as disclosed herein are those that have been appropriately cured and/or aged. Descriptions of various types of curing processes for various types of tobaccos are set forth in Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology, Davis et al. (Eds.) (1999). Examples of techniques and conditions for curing flue-cured tobacco are set forth in Nestor et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 20, 467-475 (2003) and US Pat. No. 6,895,974 to Peele , which are incorporated herein by reference. Representative techniques and conditions for air curing tobacco are set forth in US Pat. No. 7,650,892 to Groves et al. ; Roton et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 21, 305-320 (2005) and Staaf et al., Beitrage Tabakforsch. Int., 21, 321-330 (2005), which are incorporated herein by reference. Certain types of tobaccos can be subjected to alternative types of curing processes, such as fire curing or sun curing.
  • In some embodiments, tobacco materials that can be employed include flue-cured or Virginia (e.g., K326), burley, sun-cured (e.g., Indian Kurnool and Oriental tobaccos, including Katerini, Prelip, Komotini, Xanthi and Yambol tobaccos), Maryland, dark, dark-fired, dark air cured (e.g., Madole, Passanda, Cubano, Jatin and Bezuki tobaccos), light air cured (e.g., North Wisconsin and Galpao tobaccos), Indian air cured, Red Russian and Rustica tobaccos, as well as various other rare or specialty tobaccos and various blends of any of the foregoing tobaccos.
  • The tobacco material may also have a so-called "blended" form. For example, the tobacco material may include a mixture of parts or pieces of flue-cured, burley (e.g., Malawi burley tobacco) and Oriental tobaccos (e.g., as tobacco composed of, or derived from, tobacco lamina, or a mixture of tobacco lamina and tobacco stem). For example, a representative blend may incorporate about 30 to about 70 parts burley tobacco (e.g., lamina, or lamina and stem), and about 30 to about 70 parts flue cured tobacco (e.g., stem, lamina, or lamina and stem) on a dry weight basis. Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 75 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 15 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 25 parts burley tobacco, and about 10 parts Oriental tobacco; or about 65 parts flue-cured tobacco, about 10 parts burley tobacco, and about 25 parts Oriental tobacco; on a dry weight basis. Other example tobacco blends incorporate about 20 to about 30 parts Oriental tobacco and about 70 to about 80 parts flue-cured tobacco on a dry weight basis.
  • Tobacco materials used in the present disclosure can be subjected to, for example, fermentation, bleaching, and the like. If desired, the tobacco materials can be, for example, irradiated, pasteurized, or otherwise subjected to controlled heat treatment. Such treatment processes are detailed, for example, in US Pat. No. 8,061,362 to Mua et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference. In some embodiments, tobacco materials can be treated with water and an additive capable of inhibiting reaction of asparagine to form acrylamide upon heating of the tobacco material (e.g., an additive selected from the group consisting of lysine, glycine, histidine, alanine, methionine, cysteine, glutamic acid, aspartic acid, proline, phenylalanine, valine, arginine, compositions incorporating di- and trivalent cations, asparaginase, certain non-reducing saccharides, certain reducing agents, phenolic compounds, certain compounds having at least one free thiol group or functionality, oxidizing agents, oxidation catalysts, natural plant extracts (e.g., rosemary extract), and combinations thereof. See, for example, the types of treatment processes described in US Pat. Pub. Nos. 8,434,496 , 8,944,072, and 8,991,403 to Chen et al. , which are all incorporated herein by reference. Further methods are disclosed, e.g., in Int. Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos. WO2013/122948 ; WO/2020/128971 ; WO/2021/048769 ; WO/2021/048768 ; WO/2021/048770 ; and Int. Pat. Appl. No. PCT/IB2021/058063 , which are all incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. In some embodiments, this type of treatment is useful where the original tobacco material is subjected to heat in the processes previously described.
  • In some embodiments, the type of tobacco material is selected such that it is initially visually lighter in color than other tobacco materials to some degree (e.g., whitened or bleached). Tobacco pulp can be whitened in some embodiments according to any means known in the art. For example, bleached tobacco material produced by various whitening methods using various bleaching or oxidizing agents and oxidation catalysts can be used. Example oxidizing agents include peroxides (e.g., hydrogen peroxide), chlorite salts, chlorate salts, perchlorate salts, hypochlorite salts, ozone, ammonia, potassium permanganate, and combinations thereof. Example oxidation catalysts are titanium dioxide, manganese dioxide, and combinations thereof. Processes for treating tobacco with bleaching agents are discussed, for example, in US Patent Nos. 787,611 to Daniels, Jr .; 1,086,306 to Oelenheinz ; 1,437,095 to Delling ; 1,757,477 to Rosenhoch ; 2,122,421 to Hawkinson ; 2,148,147 to Baier ; 2,170,107 to Baier ; 2,274,649 to Baier ; 2,770,239 to Prats et al. ; 3,612,065 to Rosen ; 3,851,653 to Rosen ; 3,889,689 to Rosen ; 3,943,940 to Minami ; 3,943,945 to Rosen ; 4,143,666 to Rainer ; 4,194,514 to Campbell ; 4,366,823 , 4,366,824 , and 4,388,933 to Rainer et al. ; 4,641,667 to Schmekel et al. ; 5,713,376 to Berger ; 9,339,058 to Byrd Jr. et al. ; 9,420,825 to Beeson et al. ; and 9,950,858 to Byrd Jr. et al. ; as well as in US Pat. App. Pub. Nos. 2012/0067361 to Bjorkholm et al .; 2016/0073686 to Crooks ; 2017/0020183 to Bjorkholm ; and 2017/0112183 to Bjorkholm , and in PCT Publ. Appl. Nos. WO1996/031255 to Giolvas and WO2018/083114 to Bjorkholm , all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness of at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, or at least about 80%. In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can have an ISO brightness in the range of about 50% to about 90%, about 55% to about 75%, or about 60% to about 70%. ISO brightness can be measured according to ISO 3688:1999 or ISO 2470-1:2016.
  • In some embodiments, the whitened tobacco material can be characterized as lightened in color (e.g., "whitened") in comparison to an untreated tobacco material. White colors are often defined with reference to the International Commission on Illumination's (CIE's) chromaticity diagram. The whitened tobacco material can, in some embodiments, be characterized as closer on the chromaticity diagram to pure white than an untreated tobacco material.
  • In various embodiments, the tobacco material can be treated to extract a soluble component of the tobacco material therefrom. "Tobacco extract" as used herein refers to the isolated components of a tobacco material that are extracted from solid tobacco pulp by a solvent that is brought into contact with the tobacco material in an extraction process. Various extraction techniques of tobacco materials can be used to provide a tobacco extract and tobacco solid material. See, for example, the extraction processes described in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2011/0247640 to Beeson et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference. Other example techniques for extracting components of tobacco are described in US Pat. Nos. 4,144,895 to Fiore ; 4,150,677 to Osborne, Jr. et al. ; 4,267,847 to Reid ; 4,289,147 to Wildman et al. ; 4,351,346 to Brummer et al. ; 4,359,059 to Brummer et al. ; 4,506,682 to Muller ; 4,589,428 to Keritsis ; 4,605,016 to Soga et al. ; 4,716,911 to Poulose et al. ; 4,727,889 to Niven, Jr. et al. ; 4,887,618 to Bernasek et al. ; 4,941,484 to Clapp et al. ; 4,967,771 to Fagg et al. ; 4,986,286 to Roberts et al. ; 5,005,593 to Fagg et al. ; 5,018,540 to Grubbs et al. ; 5,060,669 to White et al. ; 5,065,775 to Fagg ; 5,074,319 to White et al. ; 5,099,862 to White et al. ; 5,121,757 to White et al. ; 5,131,414 to Fagg ; 5,131,415 to Munoz et al. ; 5,148,819 to Fagg ; 5,197,494 to Kramer ; 5,230,354 to Smith et al. ; 5,234,008 to Fagg ; 5,243,999 to Smith ; 5,301,694 to Raymond et al. ; 5,318,050 to Gonzalez-Parra et al. ; 5,343,879 to Teague ; 5,360,022 to Newton ; 5,435,325 to Clapp et al. ; 5,445,169 to Brinkley et al. ; 6,131,584 to Lauterbach ; 6,298,859 to Kierulff et al. ; 6,772,767 to Mua et al. ; and 7,337,782 to Thompson, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Typical inclusion ranges for tobacco materials can vary depending on the nature and type of the tobacco material, and the intended effect on the final composition, with an example range of up to about 30% by weight (or up to about 20% by weight or up to about 10% by weight or up to about 5% by weight), based on total weight of the mixture (e.g., about 0.1 to about 15% by weight). In some embodiments, a tobacco material (e.g., a whitened tobacco material) is included in a relatively small amount (e.g., about 0.01% to about 0.1% by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • Other Additives
  • Other additives can be included in the disclosed composition. For example, the composition can be processed, blended, formulated, combined and/or mixed with other materials or ingredients. The additives can be artificial, or can be obtained or derived from herbal or biological sources. Examples of further types of additives include additional thickening or gelling agents (e.g., fish gelatin), emulsifiers, preservatives (e.g., potassium sorbate and the like), zinc or magnesium salts selected to be relatively water soluble for compositions with greater water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc gluconate) or selected to be relatively water insoluble for compositions with reduced water solubility (e.g., magnesium or zinc oxide), disintegration aids, or combinations thereof. See, for example, those representative components, combination of components, relative amounts of those components, and manners and methods for employing those components, set forth in US Pat. No. 9,237,769 to Mua et al. , US Pat. No. 7,861,728 to Holton, Jr. et al. , US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2010/0291245 to Gao et al. , and US Pat. App. Pub. No. 2007/0062549 to Holton, Jr. et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Typical inclusion ranges for such additional additives can vary depending on the nature and function of the additive and the intended effect on the final composition, with an example range of up to about 10% by weight, based on total weight of the composition (e.g., about 0.1 to about 5% by weight). These same weight ranges can be applied to the sheet or extrudate material.
  • The aforementioned additives can be employed together (e.g., as additive formulations) or separately (e.g., individual additive components can be added at different stages involved in the preparation of the final composition). Furthermore, the aforementioned types of additives may be encapsulated as provided in the final product. Example encapsulated additives are described, for example, in WO2010/132444 to Atchley, which has been previously incorporated by reference herein.
  • Method of Preparing Sheet or Extrudate Material
  • In some embodiments, the oral product includes particles of a material originally prepared in sheet form. For example, a sheet material could be made using cast sheet technology. As a non-limiting example description, a cast sheet disclosed herein may be prepared by combining the individual material ingredients (e.g., binder, filler, active ingredient, and flavorant) to form a slurry (10-40% w/w) in water, which may be cast or dispensed onto a surface (such as, for example, a moving stainless steel belt or Mylar® brand carrier surface). The cast slurry may then experience one or more drying and/or doctoring steps such that the result is a relatively consistent thickness cast sheet. Other examples of casting and paper-making techniques are set forth in U.S. Pat. No. 4,674,519 to Keritsis et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,941,484 to Clapp et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,987,906 to Young et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,972,854 to Kiernan et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,099,864 to Young et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,143,097 to Sohn et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,159,942 to Brinkley et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,322,076 to Brinkley et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,339,838 to Young et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,377,698 to Litzinger et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,501,237 to Young ; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,216,706 to Kumar ; the disclosures of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • The manner by which the various components of the mixture are combined may vary. For example, the components noted above, which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients. The various components of the mixture may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art. Any mixing method that brings the mixture ingredients into intimate contact can be used, such as a mixing apparatus featuring an impeller or other structure capable of agitation. Examples of mixing equipment include casing drums, conditioning cylinders or drums, liquid spray apparatus, conical-type blenders, ribbon blenders, mixers available as FKM130, FKM600, FKM1200, FKM2000 and FKM3000 from Littleford Day, Inc., Plough Share types of mixer cylinders, Hobart mixers, and the like. See also, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in US Pat. Nos. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al. ; 6,510,855 to Korte et al. ; and 6,834,654 to Williams , each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Manners and methods for formulating mixtures will be apparent to those skilled in the art. See, for example, the types of methodologies set forth in US Pat. No. 4,148,325 to Solomon et al. ; US Pat. No. 6,510,855 to Korte et al. ; and US Pat. No. 6,834,654 to Williams , US Pat. Nos. 4,725,440 to Ridgway et al. , 6,077,524 to Bolder et al. , and US2020/0178591 to Frobisher et al. , each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • The thickness of the resulting sheet form may vary. As used herein, the term "thickness" describes the shortest distance between a first surface and a second surface. In some cases, the sheet material may have a thickness of about 0.015 mm to about 10 mm. Suitably, the thickness may be in the range of about 0.05 mm, 0.1 mm or 0.15 mm to about 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, 1 mm, 0.5 mm or 0.3 mm. In some embodiments, the flat sheet has a thickness from about 0.3 to about 0.8 mm.
  • In some embodiments, the oral product includes particles of a material originally prepared in extruded form using extrusion technology. As a non-limiting example description, an extruded material disclosed herein may be prepared by combining the individual ingredients (e.g., binder, filler, active ingredient, and flavorant), to form a dough or agglomerated mass, and extruding the dough. The manner by which the various ingredients are combined may vary. For example, the components noted above, which may be in liquid or dry solid form, can be admixed in a pretreatment step prior to mixture with any remaining components, or simply mixed together with all other liquid or dry ingredients. The various ingredients of the material may be contacted, combined, or mixed together using any mixing technique or equipment known in the art, such as the mixing equipment and technology noted above.
  • The dough or agglomerate is then extruded. The extrusion can be carried out using extruders such as screw, auger, injection molding, sieve, basket, roll, and ram-type extruders, extruding the agglomerate through suitably sized and shaped die apertures. In some embodiments, the dough is extruded into a sheet form on a twin-screw extruder using a 0.8 mm thick by 1.25 inches wide die. In some embodiments, the dough is extruded into sheet form, followed by rolling between cylinders (size press).
  • The resulting cast sheet or extrudate material may optionally be dried to remove at least a portion of the liquid content (e.g., water). The final water content may be from about 5 to about 25% by weight (e.g., about 8-21% by weight) by weight on a wet basis. Additionally, flavorants, humectants, and the like can be added to the material after drying.
  • The sheet or extrudate material may be cut into smaller pieces or particles to enhance the ability to use the material with conventional pouching equipment using any cutting or shredding technique known in the art. For example, the material may be shredded or cut into strips, such as by applying about 50 to 150 cuts per inch to a sheet material using a series of blades arranged in parallel. Through control of the shredding cut width and length (shred size), the overall density of the pouch fill can be altered as desired, such as to achieve densities higher or lower than a conventional pouch fill such as, for example, a pouch containing MCC filler only.
  • The particle size of the sheet or extrudate material after the sizing operation can vary, and can be measured by sieve analysis. As the skilled person will readily appreciate, sieve analysis (otherwise known as a gradation test) is a method used to measure the particle size distribution of a particulate material. Typically, sieve analysis involves a nested column of sieves which comprise screens, preferably in the form of wire mesh cloths. A pre-weighed sample may be introduced into the top or uppermost sieve in the column, which has the largest screen openings or mesh size (i.e., the largest pore diameter of the sieve). Each lower sieve in the column has progressively smaller screen openings or mesh sizes than the sieve above. Typically, at the base of the column of sieves is a receiver portion to collect any particles having a particle size smaller than the screen opening size or mesh size of the bottom or lowermost sieve in the column (which has the smallest screen opening or mesh size).
  • In some embodiments, the column of sieves may be placed on or in a mechanical agitator. The agitator causes the vibration of each of the sieves in the column. The mechanical agitator may be activated for a pre-determined period of time in order to ensure that all particles are collected in the correct sieve. In some embodiments, the column of sieves is agitated for a period of time from 0.5 minutes to 10 minutes, such as from 1 minute to 10 minutes, such as from 1 minute to 5 minutes, such as for approximately 3 minutes. Once the agitation of the sieves in the column is complete, the material collected on each sieve is weighed. The weight of each sample on each sieve may then be divided by the total weight in order to obtain a percentage of the mass retained on each sieve. As the skilled person will readily appreciate, the screen opening sizes or mesh sizes for each sieve in the column used for sieve analysis may be selected based on the granularity or known maximum/minimum particle sizes of the sample to be analysed. In some embodiments, a column of sieves may be used for sieve analysis, wherein the column comprises from 2 to 20 sieves, such as from 5 to 15 sieves.
  • In some embodiments, any particulate material referenced herein, such as particles derived from a sheet or extrudate material, can be characterized as having at least 40% by weight of particles (e.g., at least 50% by weight or at least about 60% by weight) of particles with a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 µm, such as no greater than about 900 µm or such as no greater than about 850 µm. In some embodiments, at least 50% by weight, such as at least 60% by weight, such as at least 70% by weight, such as at least 80% by weight, such as at least 90% by weight, such as at least 95% by weight, such as at least 99% by weight of the particles of any particulate material referenced herein have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of from about 0.01 µm to about 1200 µm, such as from about 0.05 µm to about 1000 µm, such as from about 0.1 µm to about 900 µm, such as from about 0.25 µm to about 850 µm.
  • In some embodiments, the average particle size of any particulate material referenced herein, such as particles derived from a sheet or extrudate material, is about 100 microns to about 1000 microns, such as about 250 microns to about 750 microns. For example, in some embodiments, the average particle size is about 100 microns to about 500 microns, e.g., about 100 microns to about 400 microns, about 100 microns to about 300 microns, about 100 microns to about 200 microns, about 200 microns to about 500 microns, about 200 microns to about 400 microns, about 200 microns to about 300 microns, about 300 microns to about 500 microns, about 300 microns to about 400 microns, or about 400 microns to about 500 microns. In some embodiments, the average particle size is about 500 microns to about 1000 microns, e.g., about 500 microns to about 900 microns, about 500 microns to about 800 microns, about 500 microns to about 700 microns, about 500 microns to about 600 microns, about 600 microns to about 1000 microns, about 600 microns to about 900 microns, about 600 microns to about 800 microns, about 600 microns to about 700 microns, about 700 microns to about 1000 microns, about 700 microns to about 900 microns, about 700 microns to about 800 microns, about 800 microns to about 1000 microns, about 800 microns to about 900 microns, or about 900 microns to about 1000 microns.
  • As noted previously, the particles of sheet or extrudate material can be combined with other oral product composition ingredients, such as additional filler components and the like. This combination can be accomplished using any known mixing methods and equipment, including methods and equipment noted herein previously. Once the final composition is mixed, placement within a pouch can occur.
  • Pouches
  • A moisture-permeable packet or pouch can act as a container for use of the composition within. For example, the pouch provides a liquid-permeable container of a type that may be considered to be similar in character to the mesh-like type of material that is used for the construction of a tea bag. If desired, flavoring ingredients, disintegration aids, and other desired components, may be incorporated within, or applied to, the pouch material. The composition/construction of such packets or pouches, such as the container pouch 20 illustrated in FIG. 1, can vary.
  • The pouches can be formed from a fleece material, e.g., fibrous nonwoven webs. A "fleece material" as used herein may be formed from various types of fibers (e.g., cellulosic fibers, such as viscose fibers, regenerated cellulose fibers, cellulose fibers, and wood pulps; cotton fibers; other natural fibers; or polymer/synthetic-type fibers; or combinations thereof) capable of being formed into a traditional fleece fabrics or other traditional pouch materials. For example, fleece materials may be provided in the form of a woven or nonwoven fabric. Suitable types of fleece materials, for example, are described in U.S. Patent No. 8,931,493 to Sebastian et al. ; US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0000140 to Sebastian et al. ; and US Patent App. Pub. No. 2016/0073689 to Sebastian et al. ; which are all incorporated herein by reference.
  • The term "nonwoven" is used herein in reference to fibrous materials, webs, mats, batts, or sheets in which fibers are aligned in an undefined or random orientation. The nonwoven fibers are initially presented as unbound fibers or filaments. An important step in the manufacturing of nonwovens involves binding the various fibers or filaments together. The manner in which the fibers or filaments are bound can vary, and include thermal, mechanical and chemical techniques that are selected in part based on the desired characteristics of the final product, as discussed in more detail below.
  • In various embodiments, the pouch material can be dissolvable (i.e., orally ingestible) such that under conditions of normal use (i.e., upon contact with saliva in the mouth of a user), the pouch material dissolves. Preferably, the pouch material will dissolve after a significant amount of the soluble components of the composition within the pouch (e.g., active ingredient(s) and/or flavorant(s)) permeate through the pouch material into the mouth of the user. For example, the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate such that the pouch material holds the composition together for a period of time sufficient to allow for the release of substantially all water-soluble components. As described herein, in some embodiments, the composition within the pouch material can also be dissolvable. In such embodiments, the pouch material can be configured to dissolve at a rate similar to the rate at which the composition dissolves. In some embodiments, the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in about 5 minutes or longer, about 15 minutes or longer, about 30 minutes or longer, or about an hour or longer. In some embodiments, the pouch material can be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in no less than 30 minutes, no less than 45 minutes, or no less than an hour. In some embodiments, the pouch material may be adapted to or configured to at least partially dissolve or completely dissolve in a time of about 30 seconds to about 30 minutes, about 1 minute to about 25 minutes, about 5 minutes to about 20 minutes, or about 5 minutes to about 15 minutes. Without being limited by theory, a pouched product comprising a dissolvable pouch material can provide environmental advantages.
  • In various embodiments, dissolvable pouch materials can include, but are not limited to, spun or nonwoven alginate fibers, gluten fibers, mini-perforated flat sheets derived from alginate, carrageenan, and other polymer binders, and combinations thereof. Without being limited by theory, the dissolution rate of the pouch material can be controlled by the use of crosslinking technology between alginate or pectin and calcium salts, for example. In some embodiments, the dissolvable pouch material can include fast dissolving fibers formed using an electrospinning process (e.g., solution-based electrospinning) with hydrophilic polymers. See, e.g., the techniques and fibers disclosed in Asawahame, Chawalinee et al., Formation of Orally Fast Dissolving Fibers Containing Propolis by Electrospinning Technique, Chiang Mai J. Sci. 2015; 42(2), p. 469-480, which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • In some embodiments, the fibers within the fleece material may include, but are not limited to, a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyglycolic acid, polylactic acid, polyhydroxyalkanoates, polycaprolactone, polybutylene succinate, polybutylene succinate adipate, and copolymers thereof. In some embodiments, the fibers within the fleece material may be selected from the groups consisting of wool, cotton, fibers made of cellulosic material, such as regenerated cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose triacetate, cellulose nitrate, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, hydroxypropyl cellulose, methyl hydroxypropyl cellulose, protein fibers, and the like. See also, the fiber types set forth in US Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2014/0083438 to Sebastian et al. , which is incorporated by reference herein. In various embodiments, the pouch material can include a polymer selected from the group consisting of polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol, and combinations thereof.
  • Regenerated cellulose fibers (e.g., viscose or lyocell fibers) can be particularly advantageous, and are typically prepared by extracting non-cellulosic compounds from wood, contacting the extracted wood with caustic soda, followed by carbon disulfide and then by sodium hydroxide, giving a viscous solution. The solution is subsequently forced through spinneret heads to create viscous threads of regenerated fibers. Example methods for the preparation of regenerated cellulose are provided in U.S. Pat. No. 4,237,274 to Leoni et al ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,666 to Baldini et al ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,252,766 to Baldini et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,388,256 to Ishida et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 4,535,028 to Yokogi et al. ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,441,689 to Laity ; U.S. Pat. No. 5,997,790 to Vos et al. ; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,177,938 to Sumnicht , which are incorporated herein by reference. The manner in which the regenerated cellulose is made is not limiting, and can include, for example, both the rayon and the TENCEL processes. Various suppliers of regenerated cellulose are known, including Lenzing (Austria), Cordenka (Germany), Aditya Birla (India), and Daicel (Japan).
  • The fibers used in the nonwoven web according to the present disclosure can vary, and include fibers having any type of cross-section, including, but not limited to, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, and multilobal. In some embodiments, the fibers can have one or more void spaces, wherein the void spaces can have, for example, circular, rectangular, square, oval, triangular, or multilobal cross-sections. As noted previously, the fibers can be selected from single-component (i.e., uniform in composition throughout the fiber) or multicomponent fiber types including, but not limited to, fibers having a sheath/core structure and fibers having an islands-in-the-sea structure, as well as fibers having a side-by-side, segmented pie, segmented cross, segmented ribbon, or tipped multilobal cross-sections.
  • The physical parameters of the fibers present in the nonwoven web can vary. For example, the fibers used in the nonwoven web can have varying size (e.g., length, dpf) and crimp characteristics. In some embodiments, fibers used in the nonwoven web can be nano fibers, submicron fibers, and/or micron-sized fibers. In some embodiments, fibers of the nonwoven webs useful herein can measure about 1.5 dpf to about 2.0 dpf, or about 1.6 dpf to about 1.90 dpf. In a preferred embodiment, each fiber can be a staple fiber. Each fiber length can measure about 35 mm to about 60 mm, or about 38 mm to about 55 mm, for example. In various embodiments, each fiber can measure about 4-10 crimps per cm, or about 5-8 crimps per cm. It can be advantageous for all fibers in the nonwoven web to have similar fiber size and crimp attributes to ensure favorable blending and orientation of the fibers in the nonwoven web.
  • The fibrous webs can have varying thicknesses, porosities and other parameters. The nonwoven web can be formed such that the fiber orientation and porosity of the pouched product formed therefrom can retain the composition adapted for oral use that is enclosed within the outer water-permeable pouch, but can also allow the flavors of the composition to be enjoyed by the consumer. For example, in some embodiments, the fibrous webs can have a basis weight of about 20 gsm to about 60 gsm, about 20 gsm to about 35 gsm, or about 25 gsm to about 30 gsm. In a preferred embodiment, the fibrous web can have a basis weight of about 28 gsm. Basis weight of a fabric can be measured using ASTM D3776/D3776M-09a(2013) (Standard Test Methods for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric), for example. In various embodiments, the fibrous web can have a thickness of about 0.1 mm to about 0.15 mm (e.g., about 0.11 mm). The fibrous web can have an elongation of about 70% to about 80%, e.g., about 78%. In some embodiments, the fibrous web can have a peak load of about 4 lbs. to about 8 lbs., e.g., about 5.5 lbs. Elongation and breaking strength of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D5034-09(2013) (Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)), for example. In various embodiments, the fibrous web can have a Tensile Energy Absorption (TEA) of about 35 to about 40, e.g., about 37. In some embodiments, the fibrous web can have a porosity of greater than about 10,000 ml/min/cm2. TEA can be measured, for example, as the work done to break the specimen under tensile loading per lateral area of the specimen. Porosity, or air permeability of textile fabrics can be measured using ASTM D737-04(2012) (Standard Test method for Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics), for example.
  • In various embodiments of the pouched product described herein, the outer water-permeable pouch is made from a nonwoven web as described above. In some embodiments, a pouch is constructed of a single layer of the nonwoven web. In various embodiments, the pouch material comprises a multilayer composite made up of two or more nonwoven layers, each layer being orally ingestible. Each nonwoven layer can be formed by processes discussed below. In a multilayer structure, a first layer can be relatively hydrophilic and a second layer can be relatively hydrophobic (compared to each other). In some embodiments, an outer water-permeable pouch can comprise an outer hydrophilic layer and an inner hydrophobic layer that can be in contact with the composition adapted for oral use. As such, the hydrophobic layer can, during storage of the pouched product, retain any moisture in the composition adapted for oral use such that flavors in the composition are not lost due to moisture loss. However, capillaries in the hydrophobic layer can wick out moisture into the mouth of the user, such that flavors are released into the oral cavity when used. In this manner, the pouch material can enhance storage stability without significantly compromising the enjoyment of the product by the end user. In less preferred embodiments, the relatively hydrophilic layer could be located on the interior of the multi-layer structure. The two layers can be formed into a multi-layer composite nonwoven material using any means known in the art, such as by attaching the two layers together using adhesive or stitching. The hydrophobicity of a textile material can be evaluated, for example, by measuring the contact angles between a drop of liquid and the surface of a textile material, as is known in the art.
  • In some embodiments, the pouch material can comprise a flavor component which can be applied to the nonwoven layer in any conventional manner such as by coating, printing, and the like. In some embodiments of a pouched product described herein, the flavor within an outer pouch material can differ from a flavor contained within the internal composition adapted for oral use.
  • In some embodiments, a heat sealable binder coating or a binder material (e.g., a coating or other additive) may be added to the fibers prior to, during, or after forming the fleece material. As used herein, "heat sealable binder coatings" refers to coating materials, such as acrylic polymer compositions, applied to a substrate (e.g., a nonwoven web or fleece material) and which are capable of sealing seams of individual pouches upon heating. In some embodiments, a binder material can be added to the web fibers before or during the laying of the fibrous web (i.e., before the fibrous web is bonded to form a fleece material). In some embodiments, a binder material can be added to the fleece material after it has been formed. In various embodiments, the binder material is in the form of a liquid coating. In some embodiments, a binding powder can be applied to the fleece material. For example, powdered polyethylene can be used as a binder material. The liquid or powder coating can be applied, for example, between layers of fibers when cross-laying, air laying, or as an after treatment. A short exposure in an oven is sufficient to melt and fuse the binder material.
  • Pouching Process
  • Various manufacturing apparatuses and methods can be used to create a pouched product described herein. For example, US Publication No. 2012/0055493 to Novak, III et al. , incorporated by reference in its entirety, relates to an apparatus and process for providing pouch material formed into a tube for use in the manufacture of smokeless tobacco products. Similar apparatuses that incorporate equipment for supplying a continuous supply of a pouch material (e.g., a pouch processing unit adapted to supply a pouch material to a continuous tube forming unit for forming a continuous tubular member from the pouch material) can be used to create a pouched product described herein. Representative equipment for forming such a continuous tube of pouch material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0101588 to Boldrini et al. , which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. The apparatus further includes equipment for supplying pouched material to the continuous tubular member such that, when the continuous tubular member is subdivided and sealed into discrete pouch portions, each pouch portion includes a charge of a composition adapted for oral use. Representative equipment for supplying the filler material is disclosed, for example, in U.S. Patent Application Publication No. US 2010/0018539 to Brinkley , which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some instances, the apparatus may include a subdividing unit for subdividing the continuous tubular member into individual pouch portions and, once subdivided into the individual pouch portions, may also include a sealing unit for sealing at least one of the ends of each pouch portion. In other instances, the continuous tubular member may be sealed into individual pouch portions with a sealing unit and then, once the individual pouch portions are sealed, the continuous tubular member may be subdivided into discrete individual pouch portions by a subdividing unit subdividing the continuous tubular member between the sealed ends of serially-disposed pouch portions. Still in other instances, sealing (closing) of the individual pouch portions of the continuous tubular member may occur substantially concurrently with the subdivision thereof, using a closing and dividing unit.
  • The amount of material contained within each pouch may vary. In various embodiments, the weight of the mixture within each pouch is at least about 50 mg, for example, from about 50 mg to about 2 grams, from about 100 mg to about 1.5 grams, or from about 200 mg to about 700 mg. In certain smaller embodiments, the dry weight of the material within each pouch is about 50 mg to about 150 mg. For some larger embodiments, the dry weight of the material within each pouch is typically about 300 mg to about 500 mg.
  • EXPERIMENTAL Example 1
  • Material BA was prepared with a solution set forth in Table 2A. A dry film was made by the following process: 1) heat water; 2) add surfactant and mix for 20-30 seconds; 3) add gelling agents and HPMC(s) and mix; 4) add glycerin when solution is lump free; 5) add remaining ingredients and continue mixing until smooth; and 6) cast film composition on Mylar® film and dry at about 100 °C. The dried film had the composition set forth in Table 2B below.
  • The dry material was passed through a shredder set to 100 cpi a total of 6 times in order to cut the sheet into particles sufficient to be pouched on a pouch filling machine. The resulting ratio of particle sizes are given below in Table 3 below. Table 2A. Solution For Making BA
    Ingredient Wt (g)
    Water 2361.7
    Lumulse GMS-K (Surfactant) 29.6
    AnyAddy® AN 5 (HPMC) 422.6
    AnyAddy® CN10M (HPMC) 102.8
    Agaroid® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 28.0
    Glycerin 167.7
    Polyoxyl (40) Stearate (Emulsifier) 73.2
    Vivapur® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 266.1
    Sodium Chloride 4.9
    Instant Pure-Cote® B792 (Starch) 39.4
    Xylitol 79.6
    Sucralose 10.1
    Nicotine Benzoate, (Aqueous 12% Nicotine) 167.0
    Sodium Benzoate 83.3
    Flavor 14.0
    Table 2B. Dry Material BA
    Ingredient Dry Wt %
    Water 4.2
    Lumulse GMS-K (Surfactant) 2.1
    AnyAddy® AN 5 (HPMC) 30.2
    AnyAddy® CN10M (HPMC) 7.3
    Agaroid® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 2.0
    Glycerin 12.0
    Polyoxyl (40) Stearate (Emulsifier) 5.2
    Vivapur® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 19.0
    Sodium Chloride 0.4
    Instant Pure-Cote® B792 (Starch) 2.8
    Xylitol 5.7
    Sucralose 0.7
    Nicotine Benzoate 1.4
    Sodium Benzoate 5.9
    Flavor 1.0
    Table 3. Particle Size Ratios of Material BA Post-Shredding
    Mesh Size Percent Inclusion Solids (g)
    >5 (4.75 mm) 0.2% 0.3
    5 to 10 (4.75 to 2 mm) 0.4% 0.7
    10 to 12 (2 to 1.7 mm) 0.5% 1.0
    12 to 16 (1.7 to 1.18 mm) 7.3% 14.5
    16 to 20 (1.18mm to 850 µm) 34.2% 68.1
    20 to 30 (850 to 600 µm) 32.1% 64.0
    <30 (Pass-Through) 25.4% 50.5
  • Pouches were made using a fleece (viscose polyester blend fleece, with an acrylate binder) and fill material B 1, prepared with the composition as listed in Table 4 below. The pouch was created with about 470 mg of fill material giving a final pouch weight about 487 mg. Pouch pH was about 6.83. Table 4. Fill B1
    Material %
    Cellulose Sphere, 500 µm 25
    Material BA (Shredded) 75
  • Example 2
  • Material BB was prepared with a solution as set forth in Table 5 below. A dry film was made by the following process: 1) heat water; 2) add surfactant and mix for 20-30 seconds; 3) add gelling agents and Pullulan and mix; 4) add glycerin when solution is lump free; 5) add remaining ingredients and continue mixing until smooth; and 6) cast film composition on Mylar® film and dry at about 100 °C. The dried film had the composition set forth in Table 6 below.
  • The dry material was passed through a shredder set to 100 cpi a total of 6 times. The resulting ratio of particle sizes are given below in Table 7 below. Table 5. Solution For Making BB
    Ingredient Wt (g)
    Water 1264.97
    Pullulan 396.28
    Agaroid® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 22.94
    Glycerin 28.99
    Vivapur® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 51.93
    Sodium Chloride 3.36
    Instant Pure-Cote® B792 (Starch) 26.91
    Xylitol 54.42
    Sucralose 6.93
    Nicotine Benzoate, (Aqueous 12% Nicotine) 93.86
    Sodium Benzoate 41.71
    Flavor (Vanillyl Butyl Ether) 0.34
    Flavor 7.70
    Table 6. Dry Material BB
    Ingredient Wt %
    Water 4.62
    Pullulan 57.90
    Agaroid® 300 - (Gelling Agent) 3.35
    Glycerin 4.24
    Vivapur® 101 (Microcrystalline Cellulose) 7.59
    Sodium Chloride 0.49
    Instant Pure-Cote® B792 (Starch) 3.93
    Xylitol 7.95
    Sucralose 1.01
    Nicotine Benzoate 1.65
    Sodium Benzoate 6.09
    Flavor (Vanillyl Butyl Ether) 0.05
    Flavor 1.13
    Table 7. Particle Size Ratios of Material BB Post-Shredding
    Mesh Size Percent Inclusion Solids (g)
    12 (1.7 mm) to 16 (1.18 mm) 35.73% 79.86
    16 (1.18 mm) to 20 (850 µm) 41.43% 92.58
    20 (850 µm) to 30 (600 µm) 22.84% 51.04
  • Pouches were made using a fleece (viscose polyester blend fleece, with an acrylate binder) and fill material B2 as set forth in Table 9 below, prepared with shredded material BB and the fill material composition BC as listed in Table 8 below. The pouch was created with about 470 mg of fill material giving a final pouch weight about 500 mg. Table 8. Fill Material BC
    Ingredient Wt %
    Cellulose Sphere, 1000µm 84.04
    Sodium Chloride 3.15
    Xylitol 1.76
    Sucralose 0.50
    Sodium Benzoate 1.55
    Flavor 2.00
    Nicotine Benzoate (Aqueous, 25% Nicotine) 7.00
    Table 9. Fill B2
    Material %
    Material BC 50
    Material BB (Shredded) 50

Claims (15)

  1. A pouched product comprising:
    an outer water-permeable pouch defining a cavity; and
    a composition adapted for oral use within the cavity, the composition comprising a plurality of particles, each particle comprising a mixture of at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant.
  2. The pouched product of claim 1, wherein the particles are in the form of a shredded sheet or extrudate material.
  3. The pouched product of claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the at least one binder is selected from the group consisting of agar, alginates, pectin, gums, carrageenan, povidone, pullulan, zein, cellulose ethers, starches, dextrans, and combinations thereof, optionally wherein the at least one binder comprises one or more cellulose ethers, such as methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, or a combination thereof.
  4. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the at least one filler comprises one or more cellulosic non-tobacco plant materials, such as microcrystalline cellulose.
  5. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the binder is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight and/or wherein the filler is present in an amount of about 5 to about 50 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  6. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein each particle further comprises one or more surfactants, optionally wherein the one or more surfactants are present in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight, based on the total weight of the particle.
  7. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of pH adjusters, buffering agents, colorants, disintegration aids, antioxidants, humectants, preservatives, sweeteners, salts, and combinations thereof, such as wherein each particle further comprises one or more additional components selected from the group consisting of glycerin, propylene glycol, sugar alcohols, non-nutritive sweeteners, sodium chloride, and combinations thereof.
  8. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein each particle comprises one or more active ingredients selected from the group consisting of a nicotinic component, nutraceuticals, botanicals, stimulants, amino acids, vitamins, cannabinoids, cannabamimetics, terpenes, pharmaceutical agents, and combinations thereof, optionally wherein each particle comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof.
  9. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein each particle comprises:
    at least one binder in an amount of about 20 to about 70 % by weight;
    at least one filler in an amount of about 5 to about 20 % by weight;
    one or more surfactants in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight;
    at least one flavorant or at least one active ingredient in an amount of about 0.5 to about 20 % by weight;
    optionally, at least one humectant in an amount of about 5 to about 15 % by weight; and
    optionally, at least one sweetener in an amount of about 1 to about 10 % by weight.
  10. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 µm.
  11. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the composition is substantially free of a tobacco material.
  12. The pouched product of any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the composition further comprises at least one additional filler admixed with the plurality of particles, optionally wherein the at least one additional filler comprises cellulose spheres, such as microcrystalline cellulose spheres.
  13. A method of preparing a composition adapted for oral use, comprising:
    mixing water with at least one filler, at least one binder, and at least one active ingredient and/or at least one flavorant to form a mixture, optionally wherein the mixture comprises a nicotinic component selected from the group consisting of nicotine, a nicotine salt, a resin complex of nicotine, and combinations thereof;
    extruding the mixture through a die to form an extrudate or depositing the mixture onto a surface to form a sheet;
    drying the extrudate or sheet;
    shredding the extrudate or sheet to form a plurality of particles;
    optionally admixing the plurality of particles with an additional filler material, optionally wherein the additional filler comprises cellulose spheres, such as microcrystalline cellulose spheres; and
    depositing the plurality of particles within a cavity of a water-permeable pouch.
  14. The method of claim 13, wherein the mixture further comprises one or more surfactants.
  15. The method of claim 13 or 14, wherein about 60% by weight or more of the particles have a particle size as measured by sieve analysis of no greater than about 1000 µm after shredding.
EP24155134.0A 2024-01-31 2024-01-31 Pouched products containing shreddable filler Pending EP4595781A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP24155134.0A EP4595781A1 (en) 2024-01-31 2024-01-31 Pouched products containing shreddable filler
PCT/IB2025/050981 WO2025163521A1 (en) 2024-01-31 2025-01-29 Pouched products containing shreddable filler

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP24155134.0A EP4595781A1 (en) 2024-01-31 2024-01-31 Pouched products containing shreddable filler

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP4595781A1 true EP4595781A1 (en) 2025-08-06

Family

ID=89772225

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP24155134.0A Pending EP4595781A1 (en) 2024-01-31 2024-01-31 Pouched products containing shreddable filler

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP4595781A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2025163521A1 (en)

Citations (182)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US787611A (en) 1903-06-17 1905-04-18 American Cigar Company Treating tobacco.
US1086306A (en) 1912-11-11 1914-02-03 Theodor Oelenheinz Process of bleaching tobacco-leaves.
US1437095A (en) 1920-06-01 1922-11-28 August Wasmuth Process of bleaching tobacco
US1757477A (en) 1927-07-11 1930-05-06 Rosenhoch Samuel Process and device for ozonizing tobacco
US2033909A (en) 1934-12-19 1936-03-17 Niacet Chemicals Corp Manufacture of calcium levulinate
US2122421A (en) 1937-07-30 1938-07-05 Du Pont Tobacco treatment
US2148147A (en) 1933-12-30 1939-02-21 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2170107A (en) 1935-01-28 1939-08-22 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2274649A (en) 1935-01-28 1942-03-03 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2770239A (en) 1952-02-04 1956-11-13 Prats Jose Romero Process of treating tobacco
US3612065A (en) 1970-03-09 1971-10-12 Creative Enterprises Inc Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof
US3851653A (en) 1972-10-11 1974-12-03 Rosen Enterprises Inc Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof
US3889689A (en) 1971-12-20 1975-06-17 Rosen Enterprise Inc Method of treating tobacco with catalase and hydrogen peroxide
US3901248A (en) 1970-07-22 1975-08-26 Leo Ab Chewable smoking substitute composition
US3943945A (en) 1971-09-20 1976-03-16 Rosen Enterprises, Inc. Process for preparation of reconstituted tobacco sheet
US3943940A (en) 1974-09-13 1976-03-16 Isao Minami Method of removing nicotine in smoking and a smoking filter to be used therefor
US4143666A (en) 1975-08-15 1979-03-13 Philip Morris Incorporated Smoking material
US4144895A (en) 1974-03-08 1979-03-20 Amf Incorporated Solvent extraction process
US4148325A (en) 1975-08-18 1979-04-10 British-American Tobacco Company Limited Treatment of tobacco
US4150677A (en) 1977-01-24 1979-04-24 Philip Morris Incorporated Treatment of tobacco
US4194514A (en) 1976-09-27 1980-03-25 Stauffer Chemical Company Removal of radioactive lead and polonium from tobacco
US4237274A (en) 1978-02-24 1980-12-02 Snia Viscosa Societa' Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the preparation of solutions of cellulose derivatives which can be coagulated and spun to form regenerated cellulose _bodies
US4252766A (en) 1978-07-27 1981-02-24 Snia Viscosa Societa Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the preparation of formed bodies of regenerated cellulose from solutions of cellulose derivatives in dimethylsulphoxide
US4268666A (en) 1978-04-03 1981-05-19 Snia Viscosa Societa Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the dissolution of cellulose in organic solvents, solutions obtained by said process, and process for the production of formed bodies of regenerated cellulose from said solutions
US4267847A (en) 1978-05-12 1981-05-19 British-American Tobacco Company Limited Tobacco additives
US4289147A (en) 1979-11-15 1981-09-15 Leaf Proteins, Inc. Process for obtaining deproteinized tobacco freed of nicotine and green pigment, for use as a smoking product
US4340073A (en) 1974-02-12 1982-07-20 Philip Morris, Incorporated Expanding tobacco
US4351346A (en) 1980-03-08 1982-09-28 B.A.T. Cigaretten-Fabriken Gmbh Process for the preparation of aromatic substances
US4359059A (en) 1980-03-08 1982-11-16 B.A.T. Cigaretten-Fabriken Gmbh Process for the preparation of aromatic substances
US4366824A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-01-04 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for expanding tobacco
US4366823A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-01-04 Philip Morris, Incorporated Process for expanding tobacco
US4388256A (en) 1978-11-24 1983-06-14 Masamichi Ishida Process for manufacturing regenerated cellulose hollow fiber
US4388933A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-06-21 Philip Morris, Inc. Tobacco stem treatment and expanded tobacco product
US4506682A (en) 1981-12-07 1985-03-26 Mueller Adam Clear tobacco aroma oil, a process for obtaining it from a tobacco extract, and its use
US4535028A (en) 1981-10-01 1985-08-13 Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Hollow fiber of cuprammonium regenerated cellulose and process for producing the same
US4589428A (en) 1980-02-21 1986-05-20 Philip Morris Incorporated Tobacco treatment
US4605016A (en) 1983-07-21 1986-08-12 Japan Tobacco, Inc. Process for preparing tobacco flavoring formulations
US4641667A (en) 1983-12-09 1987-02-10 B.A.T. Cigarettenfabriken Gmbh Process of preparing nicotine N'-oxide and smoking products containing it
US4660577A (en) 1982-08-20 1987-04-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Dry pre-mix for moist snuff
US4674519A (en) 1984-05-25 1987-06-23 Philip Morris Incorporated Cohesive tobacco composition
US4716911A (en) 1986-04-08 1988-01-05 Genencor, Inc. Method for protein removal from tobacco
US4725440A (en) 1982-07-02 1988-02-16 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Antifungal pastille formulation and method
US4727889A (en) 1986-12-22 1988-03-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US4887618A (en) 1988-05-19 1989-12-19 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US4924887A (en) 1986-02-03 1990-05-15 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco rods and filters
US4941484A (en) 1989-05-30 1990-07-17 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US4967771A (en) 1988-12-07 1990-11-06 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for extracting tobacco
US4972854A (en) 1989-05-24 1990-11-27 Philip Morris Incorporated Apparatus and method for manufacturing tobacco sheet material
US4986286A (en) 1989-05-02 1991-01-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US4987906A (en) 1989-09-13 1991-01-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5005593A (en) 1988-01-27 1991-04-09 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco extracts
US5018540A (en) 1986-12-29 1991-05-28 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for removal of basic materials
US5060669A (en) 1989-12-18 1991-10-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5065775A (en) 1990-02-23 1991-11-19 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5074319A (en) 1990-04-19 1991-12-24 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5099864A (en) 1990-01-05 1992-03-31 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5099862A (en) 1990-04-05 1992-03-31 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5101839A (en) 1990-08-15 1992-04-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Cigarette and smokable filler material therefor
US5121757A (en) 1989-12-18 1992-06-16 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5131414A (en) 1990-02-23 1992-07-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5131415A (en) 1991-04-04 1992-07-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5143097A (en) 1991-01-28 1992-09-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5148819A (en) 1991-08-15 1992-09-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for extracting tobacco
US5159942A (en) 1991-06-04 1992-11-03 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing smokable material for a cigarette
US5197494A (en) 1991-06-04 1993-03-30 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5230354A (en) 1991-09-03 1993-07-27 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5234008A (en) 1990-02-23 1993-08-10 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5243999A (en) 1991-09-03 1993-09-14 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5259403A (en) 1992-03-18 1993-11-09 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process and apparatus for expanding tobacco cut filler
US5301694A (en) 1991-11-12 1994-04-12 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for isolating plant extract fractions
US5318050A (en) 1991-06-04 1994-06-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5322076A (en) 1992-02-06 1994-06-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco-containing papers for cigarettes
US5339838A (en) 1992-08-17 1994-08-23 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for providing a reconstituted tobacco material
US5343879A (en) 1991-06-21 1994-09-06 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5360022A (en) 1991-07-22 1994-11-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5377698A (en) 1993-04-30 1995-01-03 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Reconstituted tobacco product
US5387416A (en) 1993-07-23 1995-02-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco composition
US5435325A (en) 1988-04-21 1995-07-25 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco extracts using a solvent in a supercritical state
US5441689A (en) 1991-12-02 1995-08-15 Courtaulds Plc Process of making regenerated cellulose articles
US5445169A (en) 1992-08-17 1995-08-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing a tobacco extract
US5501237A (en) 1991-09-30 1996-03-26 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5539093A (en) 1994-06-16 1996-07-23 Fitzmaurice; Wayne P. DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in carotenoid biosynthesis
WO1996031255A1 (en) 1995-04-07 1996-10-10 George Giolvas Method and apparatus for the removal of harmful constituents from cigarettes and tobacco before smoking
US5668295A (en) 1990-11-14 1997-09-16 Philip Morris Incorporated Protein involved in nicotine synthesis, DNA encoding, and use of sense and antisense DNAs corresponding thereto to affect nicotine content in transgenic tobacco cells and plants
US5705624A (en) 1995-12-27 1998-01-06 Fitzmaurice; Wayne Paul DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in phytoene biosynthesis
US5713376A (en) 1996-05-13 1998-02-03 Berger; Carl Non-addictive tobacco products
US5844119A (en) 1994-12-21 1998-12-01 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Genetically modified plants having modulated flower development
US5908032A (en) 1996-08-09 1999-06-01 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method of and apparatus for expanding tobacco
US5997790A (en) 1995-11-20 1999-12-07 Michelin Recherche Et Technique S.A. Process for the preparation of regenerated cellulose filaments
US6077524A (en) 1994-05-06 2000-06-20 Bolder Arzneimittel Gmbh Gastric acid binding chewing pastilles
US6083527A (en) 1998-11-05 2000-07-04 Thistle; Robert Breath mint with tooth decay and halitosis prevention characteristics
US6131584A (en) 1999-04-15 2000-10-17 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Tobacco treatment process
US6216706B1 (en) 1999-05-27 2001-04-17 Philip Morris Incorporated Method and apparatus for producing reconstituted tobacco sheets
US6298859B1 (en) 1998-07-08 2001-10-09 Novozymes A/S Use of a phenol oxidizing enzyme in the treatment of tobacco
US6510855B1 (en) 2000-03-03 2003-01-28 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Tobacco recovery system
US6668839B2 (en) 2001-05-01 2003-12-30 Jonnie R. Williams Smokeless tobacco product
US6730832B1 (en) 2001-09-10 2004-05-04 Luis Mayan Dominguez High threonine producing lines of Nicotiana tobacum and methods for producing
US6772767B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-08-10 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Process for reducing nitrogen containing compounds and lignin in tobacco
US20040191322A1 (en) 2002-12-20 2004-09-30 Henri Hansson Physically and chemically stable nicotine-containing particulate material
US6834654B2 (en) 2001-05-01 2004-12-28 Regent Court Technologies, Llc Smokeless tobacco product
WO2005041699A2 (en) 2003-11-03 2005-05-12 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Flavored smokeless tabacco and methods of making
US6895974B2 (en) 1999-04-26 2005-05-24 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
WO2005063060A1 (en) 2003-12-22 2005-07-14 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Conditioning process for tobacco and/or snuff compositions
US6953040B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2005-10-11 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Tobacco mint plant material product
US20050244521A1 (en) 2003-11-07 2005-11-03 Strickland James A Tobacco compositions
US7025066B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-04-11 Jerry Wayne Lawson Method of reducing the sucrose ester concentration of a tobacco mixture
US7032601B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2006-04-25 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Encapsulated materials
US20060210488A1 (en) 2005-03-19 2006-09-21 Jakubowski Henryk P Teeth whitening candy with tartar removal and breath freshening properties
US20060236434A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2006-10-19 North Carolina State University Methods and compositions for tobacco plants with reduced nicotine
US20070062549A1 (en) 2005-09-22 2007-03-22 Holton Darrell E Jr Smokeless tobacco composition
US7208659B2 (en) 2001-05-02 2007-04-24 Conopco Inc. Process for increasing the flavonoid content of a plant and plants obtainable thereby
US7230160B2 (en) 2001-03-08 2007-06-12 Michigan State University Lipid metabolism regulators in plants
US7337782B2 (en) 2004-08-18 2008-03-04 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process to remove protein and other biomolecules from tobacco extract or slurry
US20080196730A1 (en) 2004-07-02 2008-08-21 Radi Medical Systems Ab Smokeless Tobacco Product
WO2008103935A2 (en) 2007-02-23 2008-08-28 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Novel tobacco compositions and methods of making
US20080305216A1 (en) 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Capsule clusters for oral consumption
US20080308115A1 (en) * 2007-06-08 2008-12-18 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Oral pouched products including tobacco beads
US7556047B2 (en) 2003-03-20 2009-07-07 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method of expanding tobacco using steam
US20090293889A1 (en) 2007-11-28 2009-12-03 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Smokeless compressed tobacco product for oral consumption
US7650892B1 (en) 2004-09-03 2010-01-26 Rosswil Llc Ltd. Methods for hindering formation of tobacco-specific nitrosamines
US20100018539A1 (en) 2008-07-28 2010-01-28 Paul Andrew Brinkley Smokeless tobacco products and processes
US20100101588A1 (en) 2007-03-20 2010-04-29 Azionaria Costruzioni Macchine Automatiche A.C.M.A S.P.A. Machine for manufacturing pouches of cohesionless material
US7798153B2 (en) 2004-08-23 2010-09-21 Us Smokeless Tobacco Co. Nicotiana Kawakamii smokeless tobacco
US7810507B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2010-10-12 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition
US7819124B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2010-10-26 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Tobacco articles and methods
US20100291245A1 (en) 2008-12-08 2010-11-18 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Soft, chewable and orally dissolvable and/or disintegrable products
WO2010132444A2 (en) 2009-05-11 2010-11-18 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Llc Method and device for flavoring smokeless tobacco
US7861728B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2011-01-04 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition having an outer and inner pouch
US20110139164A1 (en) 2009-12-15 2011-06-16 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco Product And Method For Manufacture
US20110247640A1 (en) 2010-04-08 2011-10-13 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless Tobacco Composition Comprising Tobacco-Derived Material and Non-Tobacco Plant Material
US20110274628A1 (en) 2010-05-07 2011-11-10 Borschke August J Nicotine-containing pharmaceutical compositions
US8061362B2 (en) 2007-07-23 2011-11-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition
US20120037175A1 (en) 2010-08-11 2012-02-16 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Meltable smokeless tobacco composition
US20120055493A1 (en) 2010-09-02 2012-03-08 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Apparatus for manufacturing a smokeless tobacco product incorporating an object, and associated method
US20120055494A1 (en) 2010-09-07 2012-03-08 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless Tobacco Product Comprising Effervescent Composition
US20120067361A1 (en) 2009-04-03 2012-03-22 X-International Aps Plant fiber product and method for its manufacture
US8177938B2 (en) 2007-01-19 2012-05-15 Georgia-Pacific Consumer Products Lp Method of making regenerated cellulose microfibers and absorbent products incorporating same
US8186360B2 (en) 2007-04-04 2012-05-29 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Cigarette comprising dark air-cured tobacco
US20120138074A1 (en) 2010-12-01 2012-06-07 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille and moulding process for forming smokeless tobacco products
US20120138073A1 (en) 2010-12-01 2012-06-07 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille and injection molding process for forming smokeless tobacco products
US20130074856A1 (en) 2011-09-22 2013-03-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Translucent smokeless tobacco product
US20130074855A1 (en) 2011-09-22 2013-03-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Translucent smokeless tobacco product
US8434496B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2013-05-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US20130152953A1 (en) 2011-12-14 2013-06-20 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco product comprising effervescent composition
WO2013122948A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-08-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Whitened tobacco composition
US20130274296A1 (en) 2012-04-17 2013-10-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Remelted ingestible products
US8627828B2 (en) 2003-11-07 2014-01-14 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Llc Tobacco compositions
US20140083438A1 (en) 2012-09-21 2014-03-27 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Fibrous composite tobacco-containing materials
US8931493B2 (en) 2010-11-01 2015-01-13 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Co. Smokeless tobacco products
US8944072B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2015-02-03 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US20150068545A1 (en) 2013-09-09 2015-03-12 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition incorporating a botanical material
US8991403B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2015-03-31 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US20150101627A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2015-04-16 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille
US20150230515A1 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-08-20 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-containing gel composition
US20160000140A1 (en) 2014-07-02 2016-01-07 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Oral pouch products
US20160073689A1 (en) 2014-09-12 2016-03-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Nonwoven pouch comprising heat sealable binder fiber
US20160073686A1 (en) 2014-09-12 2016-03-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-derived filter element
US9339058B2 (en) 2012-04-19 2016-05-17 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for producing microcrystalline cellulose from tobacco and related tobacco product
US20170020183A1 (en) 2014-04-04 2017-01-26 X-International Aps Tobacco Raw Material
US9950858B2 (en) 2015-01-16 2018-04-24 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-derived cellulose material and products formed thereof
WO2018083114A1 (en) 2016-11-02 2018-05-11 Winnington Ab Defibrated tobacco material
US20200178591A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2020-06-11 British American Tobacco (Investments) Limited Sheet of smokeable material
WO2020128971A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for whitening tobacco
WO2021048768A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Method for whitening tobacco
WO2021048770A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Alternative methods for whitening tobacco
WO2021048769A1 (en) 2019-09-13 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Method for whitening tobacco
WO2021058063A2 (en) 2019-09-23 2021-04-01 Polysecure Gmbh Sorting method
US20210169792A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral compositions and methods of manufacture
US20210169122A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral foam composition
US20210169121A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Liquid oral composition
US20210169867A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Moist oral compositions
US20210169132A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral composition including gels
US20210177038A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral products with active ingredient combinations
US20210177754A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Nanoemulsion for oral use
US20210177043A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral product
US20210186081A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-24 Nicoventures Trading Limited Pouched oral product with cannabinoid
US20210330590A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-10-28 Nicoventures Trading Limited Agents for oral composition
US20210378948A1 (en) 2020-06-08 2021-12-09 Nicoventures Trading Limited Effervescent oral composition
US20220071984A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2022-03-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral product with nicotine and ion pairing agent
US20220160675A1 (en) 2020-11-25 2022-05-26 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral cannabinoid product with lipid component
US20220400744A1 (en) * 2021-06-16 2022-12-22 Nicoventures Trading Limited Pouched product comprising dissolvable composition
US20230309603A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Agglomerated botanical material for oral products

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060228308A1 (en) 2004-02-26 2006-10-12 Cummins Barry W Oral health care drink and method for reducing malodors

Patent Citations (190)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US787611A (en) 1903-06-17 1905-04-18 American Cigar Company Treating tobacco.
US1086306A (en) 1912-11-11 1914-02-03 Theodor Oelenheinz Process of bleaching tobacco-leaves.
US1437095A (en) 1920-06-01 1922-11-28 August Wasmuth Process of bleaching tobacco
US1757477A (en) 1927-07-11 1930-05-06 Rosenhoch Samuel Process and device for ozonizing tobacco
US2148147A (en) 1933-12-30 1939-02-21 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2033909A (en) 1934-12-19 1936-03-17 Niacet Chemicals Corp Manufacture of calcium levulinate
US2170107A (en) 1935-01-28 1939-08-22 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2274649A (en) 1935-01-28 1942-03-03 Degussa Process for bleaching tobacco
US2122421A (en) 1937-07-30 1938-07-05 Du Pont Tobacco treatment
US2770239A (en) 1952-02-04 1956-11-13 Prats Jose Romero Process of treating tobacco
US3612065A (en) 1970-03-09 1971-10-12 Creative Enterprises Inc Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof
US3901248A (en) 1970-07-22 1975-08-26 Leo Ab Chewable smoking substitute composition
US3943945A (en) 1971-09-20 1976-03-16 Rosen Enterprises, Inc. Process for preparation of reconstituted tobacco sheet
US3889689A (en) 1971-12-20 1975-06-17 Rosen Enterprise Inc Method of treating tobacco with catalase and hydrogen peroxide
US3851653A (en) 1972-10-11 1974-12-03 Rosen Enterprises Inc Method of puffing tobacco and reducing nicotine content thereof
US4340073A (en) 1974-02-12 1982-07-20 Philip Morris, Incorporated Expanding tobacco
US4144895A (en) 1974-03-08 1979-03-20 Amf Incorporated Solvent extraction process
US3943940A (en) 1974-09-13 1976-03-16 Isao Minami Method of removing nicotine in smoking and a smoking filter to be used therefor
US4143666A (en) 1975-08-15 1979-03-13 Philip Morris Incorporated Smoking material
US4148325A (en) 1975-08-18 1979-04-10 British-American Tobacco Company Limited Treatment of tobacco
US4194514A (en) 1976-09-27 1980-03-25 Stauffer Chemical Company Removal of radioactive lead and polonium from tobacco
US4150677A (en) 1977-01-24 1979-04-24 Philip Morris Incorporated Treatment of tobacco
US4237274A (en) 1978-02-24 1980-12-02 Snia Viscosa Societa' Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the preparation of solutions of cellulose derivatives which can be coagulated and spun to form regenerated cellulose _bodies
US4268666A (en) 1978-04-03 1981-05-19 Snia Viscosa Societa Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the dissolution of cellulose in organic solvents, solutions obtained by said process, and process for the production of formed bodies of regenerated cellulose from said solutions
US4267847A (en) 1978-05-12 1981-05-19 British-American Tobacco Company Limited Tobacco additives
US4252766A (en) 1978-07-27 1981-02-24 Snia Viscosa Societa Nazionale Industria Applicazioni Viscosa S.P.A. Process for the preparation of formed bodies of regenerated cellulose from solutions of cellulose derivatives in dimethylsulphoxide
US4388256A (en) 1978-11-24 1983-06-14 Masamichi Ishida Process for manufacturing regenerated cellulose hollow fiber
US4289147A (en) 1979-11-15 1981-09-15 Leaf Proteins, Inc. Process for obtaining deproteinized tobacco freed of nicotine and green pigment, for use as a smoking product
US4589428A (en) 1980-02-21 1986-05-20 Philip Morris Incorporated Tobacco treatment
US4359059A (en) 1980-03-08 1982-11-16 B.A.T. Cigaretten-Fabriken Gmbh Process for the preparation of aromatic substances
US4351346A (en) 1980-03-08 1982-09-28 B.A.T. Cigaretten-Fabriken Gmbh Process for the preparation of aromatic substances
US4366823A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-01-04 Philip Morris, Incorporated Process for expanding tobacco
US4366824A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-01-04 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for expanding tobacco
US4388933A (en) 1981-06-25 1983-06-21 Philip Morris, Inc. Tobacco stem treatment and expanded tobacco product
US4535028A (en) 1981-10-01 1985-08-13 Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Hollow fiber of cuprammonium regenerated cellulose and process for producing the same
US4506682A (en) 1981-12-07 1985-03-26 Mueller Adam Clear tobacco aroma oil, a process for obtaining it from a tobacco extract, and its use
US4725440A (en) 1982-07-02 1988-02-16 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Antifungal pastille formulation and method
US4660577A (en) 1982-08-20 1987-04-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Dry pre-mix for moist snuff
US4605016A (en) 1983-07-21 1986-08-12 Japan Tobacco, Inc. Process for preparing tobacco flavoring formulations
US4641667A (en) 1983-12-09 1987-02-10 B.A.T. Cigarettenfabriken Gmbh Process of preparing nicotine N'-oxide and smoking products containing it
US4674519A (en) 1984-05-25 1987-06-23 Philip Morris Incorporated Cohesive tobacco composition
US4924887A (en) 1986-02-03 1990-05-15 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco rods and filters
US4716911A (en) 1986-04-08 1988-01-05 Genencor, Inc. Method for protein removal from tobacco
US4727889A (en) 1986-12-22 1988-03-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5018540A (en) 1986-12-29 1991-05-28 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for removal of basic materials
US5005593A (en) 1988-01-27 1991-04-09 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco extracts
US5435325A (en) 1988-04-21 1995-07-25 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco extracts using a solvent in a supercritical state
US4887618A (en) 1988-05-19 1989-12-19 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US4967771A (en) 1988-12-07 1990-11-06 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for extracting tobacco
US4986286A (en) 1989-05-02 1991-01-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US4972854A (en) 1989-05-24 1990-11-27 Philip Morris Incorporated Apparatus and method for manufacturing tobacco sheet material
US4941484A (en) 1989-05-30 1990-07-17 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US4987906A (en) 1989-09-13 1991-01-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5121757A (en) 1989-12-18 1992-06-16 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5060669A (en) 1989-12-18 1991-10-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5099864A (en) 1990-01-05 1992-03-31 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5131414A (en) 1990-02-23 1992-07-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5065775A (en) 1990-02-23 1991-11-19 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5234008A (en) 1990-02-23 1993-08-10 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5099862A (en) 1990-04-05 1992-03-31 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5074319A (en) 1990-04-19 1991-12-24 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5101839A (en) 1990-08-15 1992-04-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Cigarette and smokable filler material therefor
US5668295A (en) 1990-11-14 1997-09-16 Philip Morris Incorporated Protein involved in nicotine synthesis, DNA encoding, and use of sense and antisense DNAs corresponding thereto to affect nicotine content in transgenic tobacco cells and plants
US5143097A (en) 1991-01-28 1992-09-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5131415A (en) 1991-04-04 1992-07-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5197494A (en) 1991-06-04 1993-03-30 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco extraction process
US5159942A (en) 1991-06-04 1992-11-03 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing smokable material for a cigarette
US5318050A (en) 1991-06-04 1994-06-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5343879A (en) 1991-06-21 1994-09-06 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco treatment process
US5360022A (en) 1991-07-22 1994-11-01 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5148819A (en) 1991-08-15 1992-09-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for extracting tobacco
US5243999A (en) 1991-09-03 1993-09-14 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5230354A (en) 1991-09-03 1993-07-27 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US5501237A (en) 1991-09-30 1996-03-26 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco reconstitution process
US5301694A (en) 1991-11-12 1994-04-12 Philip Morris Incorporated Process for isolating plant extract fractions
US5441689A (en) 1991-12-02 1995-08-15 Courtaulds Plc Process of making regenerated cellulose articles
US5322076A (en) 1992-02-06 1994-06-21 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing tobacco-containing papers for cigarettes
US5259403A (en) 1992-03-18 1993-11-09 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process and apparatus for expanding tobacco cut filler
US5339838A (en) 1992-08-17 1994-08-23 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for providing a reconstituted tobacco material
US5445169A (en) 1992-08-17 1995-08-29 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process for providing a tobacco extract
US5377698A (en) 1993-04-30 1995-01-03 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Reconstituted tobacco product
US5387416A (en) 1993-07-23 1995-02-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco composition
US6077524A (en) 1994-05-06 2000-06-20 Bolder Arzneimittel Gmbh Gastric acid binding chewing pastilles
US5539093A (en) 1994-06-16 1996-07-23 Fitzmaurice; Wayne P. DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in carotenoid biosynthesis
US5844119A (en) 1994-12-21 1998-12-01 The Salk Institute For Biological Studies Genetically modified plants having modulated flower development
WO1996031255A1 (en) 1995-04-07 1996-10-10 George Giolvas Method and apparatus for the removal of harmful constituents from cigarettes and tobacco before smoking
US5997790A (en) 1995-11-20 1999-12-07 Michelin Recherche Et Technique S.A. Process for the preparation of regenerated cellulose filaments
US5705624A (en) 1995-12-27 1998-01-06 Fitzmaurice; Wayne Paul DNA sequences encoding enzymes useful in phytoene biosynthesis
US5713376A (en) 1996-05-13 1998-02-03 Berger; Carl Non-addictive tobacco products
US5908032A (en) 1996-08-09 1999-06-01 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method of and apparatus for expanding tobacco
US6298859B1 (en) 1998-07-08 2001-10-09 Novozymes A/S Use of a phenol oxidizing enzyme in the treatment of tobacco
US6083527A (en) 1998-11-05 2000-07-04 Thistle; Robert Breath mint with tooth decay and halitosis prevention characteristics
US6131584A (en) 1999-04-15 2000-10-17 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Tobacco treatment process
US6895974B2 (en) 1999-04-26 2005-05-24 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco processing
US6216706B1 (en) 1999-05-27 2001-04-17 Philip Morris Incorporated Method and apparatus for producing reconstituted tobacco sheets
US6510855B1 (en) 2000-03-03 2003-01-28 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Tobacco recovery system
US20060236434A1 (en) 2000-08-30 2006-10-19 North Carolina State University Methods and compositions for tobacco plants with reduced nicotine
US7230160B2 (en) 2001-03-08 2007-06-12 Michigan State University Lipid metabolism regulators in plants
US6834654B2 (en) 2001-05-01 2004-12-28 Regent Court Technologies, Llc Smokeless tobacco product
US6668839B2 (en) 2001-05-01 2003-12-30 Jonnie R. Williams Smokeless tobacco product
US7208659B2 (en) 2001-05-02 2007-04-24 Conopco Inc. Process for increasing the flavonoid content of a plant and plants obtainable thereby
US6730832B1 (en) 2001-09-10 2004-05-04 Luis Mayan Dominguez High threonine producing lines of Nicotiana tobacum and methods for producing
US7173170B2 (en) 2001-09-10 2007-02-06 Reynolds Technologies, Inc. High threonine producing lines of Nicotiana tobacum and methods of producing
US6953040B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2005-10-11 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Tobacco mint plant material product
US7032601B2 (en) 2001-09-28 2006-04-25 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Encapsulated materials
US6772767B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2004-08-10 Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation Process for reducing nitrogen containing compounds and lignin in tobacco
US7025066B2 (en) 2002-10-31 2006-04-11 Jerry Wayne Lawson Method of reducing the sucrose ester concentration of a tobacco mixture
US20040191322A1 (en) 2002-12-20 2004-09-30 Henri Hansson Physically and chemically stable nicotine-containing particulate material
US7556047B2 (en) 2003-03-20 2009-07-07 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method of expanding tobacco using steam
US7901512B2 (en) 2003-11-03 2011-03-08 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Flavored smokeless tobacco and methods of making
WO2005041699A2 (en) 2003-11-03 2005-05-12 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Flavored smokeless tabacco and methods of making
US20140123986A1 (en) * 2003-11-07 2014-05-08 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Tobacco Compositions
US8627828B2 (en) 2003-11-07 2014-01-14 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Llc Tobacco compositions
US20050244521A1 (en) 2003-11-07 2005-11-03 Strickland James A Tobacco compositions
US7694686B2 (en) 2003-12-22 2010-04-13 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Conditioning process for tobacco and/or snuff compositions
WO2005063060A1 (en) 2003-12-22 2005-07-14 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Conditioning process for tobacco and/or snuff compositions
US20080196730A1 (en) 2004-07-02 2008-08-21 Radi Medical Systems Ab Smokeless Tobacco Product
US7337782B2 (en) 2004-08-18 2008-03-04 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Process to remove protein and other biomolecules from tobacco extract or slurry
US7798153B2 (en) 2004-08-23 2010-09-21 Us Smokeless Tobacco Co. Nicotiana Kawakamii smokeless tobacco
US7650892B1 (en) 2004-09-03 2010-01-26 Rosswil Llc Ltd. Methods for hindering formation of tobacco-specific nitrosamines
US20060210488A1 (en) 2005-03-19 2006-09-21 Jakubowski Henryk P Teeth whitening candy with tartar removal and breath freshening properties
US20070062549A1 (en) 2005-09-22 2007-03-22 Holton Darrell E Jr Smokeless tobacco composition
US7819124B2 (en) 2006-01-31 2010-10-26 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Tobacco articles and methods
US7861728B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2011-01-04 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition having an outer and inner pouch
US7810507B2 (en) 2006-02-10 2010-10-12 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition
US8177938B2 (en) 2007-01-19 2012-05-15 Georgia-Pacific Consumer Products Lp Method of making regenerated cellulose microfibers and absorbent products incorporating same
WO2008103935A2 (en) 2007-02-23 2008-08-28 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Novel tobacco compositions and methods of making
US20100101588A1 (en) 2007-03-20 2010-04-29 Azionaria Costruzioni Macchine Automatiche A.C.M.A S.P.A. Machine for manufacturing pouches of cohesionless material
US8186360B2 (en) 2007-04-04 2012-05-29 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Cigarette comprising dark air-cured tobacco
US20080305216A1 (en) 2007-06-08 2008-12-11 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Capsule clusters for oral consumption
US20080308115A1 (en) * 2007-06-08 2008-12-18 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Oral pouched products including tobacco beads
US9237769B2 (en) 2007-07-23 2016-01-19 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition
US8061362B2 (en) 2007-07-23 2011-11-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition
US20090293889A1 (en) 2007-11-28 2009-12-03 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Smokeless compressed tobacco product for oral consumption
US20100018539A1 (en) 2008-07-28 2010-01-28 Paul Andrew Brinkley Smokeless tobacco products and processes
US20100291245A1 (en) 2008-12-08 2010-11-18 Philip Morris Usa Inc. Soft, chewable and orally dissolvable and/or disintegrable products
US20120067361A1 (en) 2009-04-03 2012-03-22 X-International Aps Plant fiber product and method for its manufacture
WO2010132444A2 (en) 2009-05-11 2010-11-18 U.S. Smokeless Tobacco Company Llc Method and device for flavoring smokeless tobacco
US11246334B2 (en) 2009-05-11 2022-02-15 Altria Client Services Llc Method and device for flavoring smokeless tobacco
US8991403B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2015-03-31 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US8434496B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2013-05-07 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US8944072B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2015-02-03 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Thermal treatment process for tobacco materials
US20110139164A1 (en) 2009-12-15 2011-06-16 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco Product And Method For Manufacture
US20110247640A1 (en) 2010-04-08 2011-10-13 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless Tobacco Composition Comprising Tobacco-Derived Material and Non-Tobacco Plant Material
US20110274628A1 (en) 2010-05-07 2011-11-10 Borschke August J Nicotine-containing pharmaceutical compositions
US20120037175A1 (en) 2010-08-11 2012-02-16 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Meltable smokeless tobacco composition
US20120055493A1 (en) 2010-09-02 2012-03-08 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Apparatus for manufacturing a smokeless tobacco product incorporating an object, and associated method
US20120055494A1 (en) 2010-09-07 2012-03-08 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless Tobacco Product Comprising Effervescent Composition
US8931493B2 (en) 2010-11-01 2015-01-13 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Co. Smokeless tobacco products
US20120138073A1 (en) 2010-12-01 2012-06-07 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille and injection molding process for forming smokeless tobacco products
US20120138074A1 (en) 2010-12-01 2012-06-07 Rj Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille and moulding process for forming smokeless tobacco products
US20130074855A1 (en) 2011-09-22 2013-03-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Translucent smokeless tobacco product
US20130074856A1 (en) 2011-09-22 2013-03-28 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Translucent smokeless tobacco product
US20130152953A1 (en) 2011-12-14 2013-06-20 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco product comprising effervescent composition
WO2013122948A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-08-22 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Whitened tobacco composition
US9420825B2 (en) 2012-02-13 2016-08-23 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Whitened tobacco composition
US20130274296A1 (en) 2012-04-17 2013-10-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Remelted ingestible products
US9339058B2 (en) 2012-04-19 2016-05-17 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for producing microcrystalline cellulose from tobacco and related tobacco product
US20140083438A1 (en) 2012-09-21 2014-03-27 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Fibrous composite tobacco-containing materials
US20150068545A1 (en) 2013-09-09 2015-03-12 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco composition incorporating a botanical material
US20150101627A1 (en) 2013-10-16 2015-04-16 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Smokeless tobacco pastille
US20150230515A1 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-08-20 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-containing gel composition
US20170112183A1 (en) 2014-04-04 2017-04-27 X-International Aps Tobacco Raw Material
US20170020183A1 (en) 2014-04-04 2017-01-26 X-International Aps Tobacco Raw Material
US20160000140A1 (en) 2014-07-02 2016-01-07 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Oral pouch products
US20160073686A1 (en) 2014-09-12 2016-03-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-derived filter element
US20160073689A1 (en) 2014-09-12 2016-03-17 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Nonwoven pouch comprising heat sealable binder fiber
US9950858B2 (en) 2015-01-16 2018-04-24 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Tobacco-derived cellulose material and products formed thereof
WO2018083114A1 (en) 2016-11-02 2018-05-11 Winnington Ab Defibrated tobacco material
US20200178591A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2020-06-11 British American Tobacco (Investments) Limited Sheet of smokeable material
WO2020128971A1 (en) 2018-12-20 2020-06-25 R. J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Method for whitening tobacco
WO2021048768A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Method for whitening tobacco
US20220071984A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2022-03-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral product with nicotine and ion pairing agent
WO2021048770A1 (en) 2019-09-11 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Alternative methods for whitening tobacco
WO2021048769A1 (en) 2019-09-13 2021-03-18 Nicoventures Trading Limited Method for whitening tobacco
WO2021058063A2 (en) 2019-09-23 2021-04-01 Polysecure Gmbh Sorting method
US20210177754A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Nanoemulsion for oral use
US20210330590A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-10-28 Nicoventures Trading Limited Agents for oral composition
US20210169132A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral composition including gels
US20210177038A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral products with active ingredient combinations
US20210169121A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Liquid oral composition
US20210177043A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-17 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral product
US20210186081A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-24 Nicoventures Trading Limited Pouched oral product with cannabinoid
US20210169867A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Moist oral compositions
US20210169792A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral compositions and methods of manufacture
US20210169122A1 (en) 2019-12-09 2021-06-10 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral foam composition
US20210378948A1 (en) 2020-06-08 2021-12-09 Nicoventures Trading Limited Effervescent oral composition
US20220160675A1 (en) 2020-11-25 2022-05-26 Nicoventures Trading Limited Oral cannabinoid product with lipid component
US20220400744A1 (en) * 2021-06-16 2022-12-22 Nicoventures Trading Limited Pouched product comprising dissolvable composition
US20230309603A1 (en) * 2022-03-31 2023-10-05 R.J. Reynolds Tobacco Company Agglomerated botanical material for oral products

Non-Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Tobacco Production, Chemistry and Technology", 1999
ASAWAHAME, CHAWALINEE ET AL.: "Formation of Orally Fast Dissolving Fibers Containing Propolis by Electrospinning Technique", CHIANG MAI J. SCI., vol. 42, no. 2, 2015, pages 469 - 480
DVORYANCHIKOV ET AL., J NEUROSCI., vol. 31, no. 15, 13 April 2011 (2011-04-13), pages 5782 - 91
LEFFINGWELL ET AL.: "Tobacco Flavoring for Smoking Products", 1972, R. J. REYNOLDS TOBACCO COMPANY
NESTOR ET AL., BEITRAGE TABAKFORSCH. INT., vol. 20, 2003, pages 467 - 475
PERFETTI, BEITRAGE TABAKFORSCHUNGINT., vol. 12, 1983, pages 43 - 54
SANTHOSH ET AL., PHYTOMEDICINE, vol. 12, 2005, pages 216 - 220
STAAF ET AL., BEITRAGE TABAKFORSCH. INT., vol. 21, 2005, pages 321 - 330
TAKAHASHI ET AL., ORAL MICROBIOLOGY AND IMMUNOLOGY, vol. 19, no. 1, 2004, pages 61 - 64

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2025163521A1 (en) 2025-08-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7663580B2 (en) Moist Oral Composition
JP2023505351A (en) Agents for oral compositions
EP4072330B1 (en) Oral products with reduced irritation
US20220400744A1 (en) Pouched product comprising dissolvable composition
US20230049343A1 (en) Shaped pouched products
US20230138306A1 (en) Oral product with a basic amine and an ion pairing agent
US20220409549A1 (en) Oral product tablet and method of manufacture
JP2023504917A (en) Oral product with controlled release
JP2023505805A (en) Oral composition with reduced water content
US20220354155A1 (en) Multi-compartment oral pouched product
US20220354156A1 (en) Oral pouched product with high density load
JP7663578B2 (en) Buffered oral compositions
EP4595781A1 (en) Pouched products containing shreddable filler
JP2023504752A (en) Oral composition with reduced water activity
EP4620318A1 (en) Pouched product with humectant
US20250261683A1 (en) Oral composition comprising encapsulated ph adjusting agent
EP4585055A1 (en) Oral product with probiotic component
EP4602929A1 (en) Oral product with powder coating
US20230200430A1 (en) Oral products with high-density load
EP4599698A1 (en) Products comprising sensory agents
EP4611565A1 (en) Products with spherical filler
WO2025133944A1 (en) Diffusion-modifying pouch for oral products
WO2024171117A1 (en) Oral products with high-density load
WO2024095162A1 (en) Method of preparing a pouched product comprising a nicotine salt

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN PUBLISHED

AK Designated contracting states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC ME MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR